JP6665130B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launch device, and when a game ball wins a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined winning value is given to the player. There is one that is configured. Further, variable display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuations”) the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display means, a predetermined game value is provided. (A so-called pachinko machine).

  The prize value means paying out a prize ball, giving a score, or giving a prize in accordance with a prize of a game ball in a prize area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine is in a state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win a hit ball, That is, a right to be in an advantageous state is generated, or a condition for paying out a prize ball is easily satisfied.

  In the pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of a variable display of a special symbol (identification information) started by the variable display means based on a game ball winning the starting winning opening. In this case, a "big hit (advantageous state)" occurs. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the state shifts to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes is won, the winning prize opening is closed. The number of opening of the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and if the opening time elapses even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the winning opening is closed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine which is configured to be able to display a specific display corresponding to a variable display and to be able to execute a change effect for changing a display mode of the specific display. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that can be switched between an effect mode in which a change effect can be executed and an effect mode in which a change effect is not executed.

JP-A-2006-154643 (paragraph 0007, FIG. 30)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, in the effect mode in which the change effect is not executed, the interest may be reduced by displaying a specific display that is not expected to change for the player.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that does not reduce the interest in an effect mode in which a specific effect is not executed.

  The present invention employs the following means in order to solve the above problems. In addition, reference numerals used in the description of the embodiments for carrying out the invention and drawings used below will be appended for reference, but the components of the present invention are not limited to those with the reference numerals.

The gaming machine of the means 1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of effect symbols) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
A specific display unit (first hold storage display unit 9a, second hold storage display unit 9b) capable of displaying a specific display (hold display) in a specific display area in response to the hold storage that is information relating to the variable display;
Determining means (portion for executing steps S220 and S222 in the game control microcomputer 560) for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display corresponding to the specific display is executed;
Based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a specific effect including a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display (a hold notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display) (a look-ahead notice effect that includes a hold notice effect). Specific effect execution means (portions for executing steps S800A, S8004 to S8010, and S8106 to S8114 in the effect control microcomputer 100);
A first effect mode (sunny mode, rain mode) in which a specific display can be displayed during the variable display and the specific effect can be executed, and a second effect in which the specific display is not displayed during the variable display and the specific effect is not executed The mode (lightning mode) and the effect mode control means (in FIG. 66, when the effect control microcomputer 100 displays a background image corresponding to the selected effect mode on the effect display device 9 in FIG. Mode and the rain mode, the setting to display the hold display, and the lightning mode to set the hold display to non-display)
A predetermined effect capable of executing a predetermined effect for reducing the visibility of a predetermined display area including the specific display area when the first effect mode is controlled and when the second effect mode is controlled; Means of execution;
Wherein the execution period of predetermined effect, in the predetermined display region, and a hold memory number informing means for informing the hold memory number in different from the specific display area region,
Wherein the predetermined demonstration execution unit, when it is controlled by the second rendering mode, and executes the predetermined effect at a higher rate than when it is controlled by the first rendering mode,
And wherein the execution period of the predetermined effect when the second is controlled to effect mode, a special effect that is not performed when it is controlled to the first presentation mode can be performed in the predetermined display region I do.
According to such a configuration, in the second effect mode in which the specific effect is not performed, the specific display is not displayed during the variable display, so that the specific display is displayed even though the specific effect is not executed. Can be prevented from decreasing.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is
Variable display (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a variable display of a special symbol, a variable display of an effect symbol, and in the case of a slot machine, a left reel in which a plurality of types of identifiable symbols are arranged on the outer periphery in a predetermined order; A gaming machine (rotating the reel and the right reel) and controlling the gaming machine to an advantageous state (eg, a jackpot gaming state in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an AT, RT, ART or the like in the case of a slot machine). Pachinko machine 1, slot machine)
Specific display corresponding to the variable display (a hold display and an active display in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a game controlled in an advantageous state such as AT, RT, and ART in the case of a slot machine when the winning state is achieved). (In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first hold storage display unit 9 a, the second hold storage display unit 9 b, the active display guide 1000, and the slot machine) In the case, the display is controlled by a sub control unit (sub CPU) mounted on the effect control board, and a liquid crystal display capable of displaying a specific display);
Judgment means for judging whether or not a predetermined condition related to the variable display is satisfied (a portion for executing the steps S220, S222, and S61 in the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1; At the start of the game (immediately after the start switch is operated), the main control unit (main CPU) performs an AT lottery, an RT lottery, and an ART based on the game state indicated by the current game state flag stored in the RAM. A lottery, and an additional lottery of AT, RT, and ART) and
A change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display (for example, a special mode of a triangle or a rectangle, a blue mode, a red mode) based on the determination result of the determination unit (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a pending announcement effect, an active announcement) A special effect execution means (an effect in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a specific effect including an effect, an effect of changing a display mode of a specific display corresponding to an unexecuted game or a running game in the case of a slot machine. A control microcomputer 100; a sub-control unit (sub-CPU) in the case of a slot machine);
A first effect mode in which a specific display can be displayed during the variable display and the specific effect can be executed (a sunny mode and a rain mode in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and an effect mode corresponding to this in the case of the slot machine); An effect controllable in a second effect mode in which the specific effect is not displayed during the variable display and the specific effect is not executed (a lightning mode in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an effect mode corresponding to the slot machine). Mode control means (the effect control microcomputer 100 in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the sub-control unit (sub-CPU) in the case of the slot machine);
A predetermined effect capable of executing a predetermined effect for reducing the visibility of a predetermined display area including the specific display area when the first effect mode is controlled and when the second effect mode is controlled; Means of execution;
Wherein the execution period of predetermined effect, in the predetermined display region, and a hold memory number informing means for informing the hold memory number in different from the specific display area region,
Wherein the predetermined demonstration execution unit, when it is controlled by the second rendering mode, and executes the predetermined effect at a higher rate than when it is controlled by the first rendering mode,
And wherein the execution period of the predetermined effect when the second is controlled to effect mode, a special effect that is not performed when it is controlled to the first presentation mode can be performed in the predetermined display region I do.
According to such a configuration, in the second effect mode in which the specific effect is not performed, the specific display is not displayed during the variable display, so that the specific display is displayed even though the specific effect is not executed. Can be prevented from decreasing.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is
A gaming machine of means 1 or 2 (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine),
Effect display means (effect display device 9 etc.) including the specific display means,
A display layout for information different from the specific display is different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode (in the lightning mode, unlike the clear mode or the rain mode, the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d, 2 suspension display guides 1002a to 1002d, active display guide 1000, etc. are not displayed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to apply an appropriate display layout according to each of the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 1 to 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine),
An operation detecting means (such as an effect control board 80 to which the push sensor 124 and the tilt direction sensor unit 123 are connected) capable of detecting an operation of the player (operation of the push button 120, operation of the stick controller 122, and the like);
The effect mode control means switches between the first effect mode and the second effect mode based on an operation of a player,
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to select which one of the first effect mode and the second effect mode to play the game.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is
Any one of the gaming machines (pachinko gaming machine 1) selected from the means 1 to 4,
Holding storage means capable of storing a plurality of holding storages (effect control provided with a RAM having a first holding number storage area for storing a first holding number and a second holding number storage area for storing a second holding number) Microcomputer 100),
Notifying means for recognizing the number of reserved storages irrespective of whether the second production mode is controlled (first reserved storage number special display area 1011 for displaying the first reserved storage number, second reserved A second reserved storage number special display area 1012) for displaying the storage number.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, even when the game is controlled to the second effect mode, the player can recognize the number of pending storages.

The gaming machine of the means 6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 1 to 5 (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine),
In a display device (effect display device 9 or the like) capable of displaying a specific display (hold display, active display), common information can be displayed regardless of the effect mode (for example, the remaining variable display that can be executed in the probable change state). The number of times (the so-called remaining ST number in the ST machine), the remaining variable display number that can be executed in the time saving state, the number of extended games, the number of balls played in the extended games, and the like are displayed in any effect mode.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately display information to be displayed regardless of the effect mode.

The gaming machine of the means 7 is
Any one of the gaming machines (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine) selected from the means 1 to 6,
As the first effect mode, there are a plurality of effect modes in which the execution ratio of the specific effect is different (the execution ratio of the suspension notice effect in the rain mode is lower than the execution ratio of the suspension notice effect in the sunny mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest by the diversity of the first effect mode.

The gaming machine of the means 8
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 1 to 7 (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine),
Determining means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, steps S220, S222, and S61 in the game control microcomputer 560 are executed). In the case of a slot machine, the main control unit (main CPU) performs lottery of the AT based on the game state indicated by the current game state flag stored in the RAM at the start of the game (immediately after operating the start switch). , RT lottery, and ART lottery, and the number of AT, RT, and ART additions.)
Notice effect execution means (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an effect control microcomputer which can execute a notice effect (notice effect during fluctuation) for notifying that the control is performed to the advantageous state based on the determination result by the decision means. 100, a sub-control unit (sub-CPU) for a slot machine,
Depending on the effect mode, the type of the notice effect is different (there is an effect that can be executed only in the lightning mode without being executed in the sunny mode and the rain mode (blackout notice, lightning effect notice effect)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, interest can be given to the notice effect performed in each effect mode.

The gaming machine of the means 9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 1 to 8 (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine),
Determining means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, steps S220, S222, and S61 in the game control microcomputer 560 are executed). In the case of the slot machine, the main control unit (main CPU) starts the game (immediately after operating the start switch),
Notice effect execution means (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an effect control microcomputer which can execute a notice effect (notice effect during fluctuation) for notifying that the control is performed to the advantageous state based on the determination result by the decision means. 100, a sub-control unit (sub-CPU) for a slot machine,
A common type of notice effect can be executed regardless of the effect mode (a cut-in notice after the reach state is established can be executed in any effect mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in the number of types of notice effects and an increase in control load.

The gaming machine of the means 10
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 1 to 9 (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine),
The specific effect execution means, after displaying the specific display in the first mode (for example, special hold, may be normal hold), suggestive effect indicating that the display mode of the specific display changes, and the specific display. (For example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S800A, S8004 to S8010, and S8106 to S8114 in the effect control microcomputer 100). ,
The display mode of the specific display includes at least the first mode and a second mode (for example, blue hold, red hold) in which the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first mode,
The specific display means can display a specific display in a plurality of types of display modes as the first mode,
The second aspect includes a predetermined mode and a specific mode in which the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the predetermined mode,
The specific effect execution means,
After executing the suggestion effect, there are cases where the change effect is executed or not,
As a change effect, after displaying the specific display according to the first aspect, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second aspect, and displaying the specific display after displaying the specific display according to the first aspect When the mode is not changed to the second mode, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode can be executed (for example, the change patterns 33 to 40 shown in FIGS. 40D and 40E). 36, and when the hold announcement effect is executed based on the change patterns 405 to 414 shown in FIGS. 41 (G) to (I), the special hold changes to a blue hold or a red hold.)
An effect of changing the display mode of the specific display changed to the third mode to the specific mode can be executed,
Depending on the execution mode of the executed change effect, being capable of performing suggestion effect by different proportions after the change effect (e.g., if the action effect in pending announcement attraction has not changed remains even special hold being executed After that, the action effect is executed again and it is possible to change from special hold to blue hold or red hold, but if the action effect is executed in the hold announcement effect and changes from special hold to blue hold or red hold, , After which no action is performed),
It is possible to execute multiple types of suggestion effects,
When the display mode of the specific display changes according to which one of the plurality of types of display mode displays the specific display as the first mode, any type of suggestion effect is performed. The ratio of
The specific display displayed in the third aspect has a lower rate of change to the predetermined aspect than the specific display displayed in the first aspect.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest in the case where the change effect is executed.
The gaming machine of the means 10
The specific display means can display a specific display in a display mode including a special mode suggesting the effect contents,
Special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the special mode,
The specific display means, after displaying the specific display in the special mode, may change the display mode of the specific display when a special effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the special mode is executed. You may.

The gaming machine of the means 11 is
The gaming machine of the means 10,
The specific effect execution means does not change the display mode of the specific display to the second mode (for example, blue hold or red hold) after displaying the specific display in the first mode (for example, special hold) as the change effect. In this case, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to a third mode (for example, normal hold) can be executed (for example, in the change patterns 31 and 32 shown in FIG. 40C and FIG. 41F). A hold announcement effect based on the change patterns 401 to 404 shown can be executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when performing the change effect.

The gaming machine of the means 12 is
The gaming machine of the means 11,
The specific effect execution means displays a specific display in a normal mode (for example, normal hold) as a first mode (see FIG. 52).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when performing the change effect.

The gaming machine of the means 13 is
The gaming machine of the means 11,
The specific effect execution means displays the specific display in a special mode (for example, special hold) different from the normal mode as the first mode (for example, change patterns 31 to 36 shown in FIGS. 40 (C) to (E) and In the case of executing the hold announcement effect based on the change patterns 401 to 414 shown in FIG. 41, the special hold is displayed once).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when performing the change effect.

The gaming machine of the means 14
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 11 to 13,
The specific effect execution means is configured to execute the operation effect (for example, FIG. 50 (5), FIG. 50 (8), FIG. 51 (5), FIG. 51 ( (E.g., the effect effect of the mode shown in 8)) (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the steps S8013 and S8105 in accordance with the process table selected in the step S8010), thereby giving a preliminary announcement effect. Perform action effects at)
The effect effect can be executed a plurality of times for the specific display displayed in the first mode (for example, in the change patterns 402 and 404 shown in FIG. 41F), the special effect is performed at the timing of the first hold shift. After the hold is displayed, the action effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift, but does not change as the special hold, and the action effect is executed at the timing of the third hold shift, and the special hold is changed to the normal hold. Which can be changed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of performing a change effect.

The gaming machine of the means 15
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 11 to 14,
When the display mode of the specific display displayed in the third mode changes to the second mode, the advantage is higher than when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the first mode changes to the second mode ( For example, as shown in FIG. 41, a change pattern (change patterns 411 and 414) in which a red hold is finally displayed even when returning from the special hold to the normal hold is provided, and only when a super reach big hit occurs , Change patterns 411 and 414 can be determined).
According to such a configuration, the sense of expectation for the specific display displayed in the third mode can be increased.

The gaming machine of the means 16 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 11 to 15,
A limiting unit that limits the number of specific displays displayed in the third mode (for example, a portion that executes steps S6005X, S6007X, S6009, and S6010 in the effect control microcomputer 100 in the second embodiment) It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in the case of executing the change effect.

The gaming machine of the means 17
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 10 to 16,
The specific display means includes at least a normal mode (for example, “white”), a first specific mode (for example, “red”) having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode (for example, suggesting the effect contents). For example, the specific display can be displayed in any of the display modes including an effect suggestion display mode (a first special suggestion mode, a second special suggestion mode, a pseudo continuous suggestion mode, and a SP suggestion mode) (for example, the third display mode). In the embodiment of the present invention, in the effect control microcomputer 100, steps S3713, S3717, S3721, S3725, S3726, S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, S4714 are executed).
Effect execution means capable of executing an effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode (for example, in the third embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the effect in the same processing as steps S8010 and S8011) By executing the same processing as steps S8013 and S8105 in accordance with the process table obtained, a special zone effect, a pseudo-sequence, and a super reach effect can be executed).
After the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode, the specific display means performs an effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode (for example, the effect of the suggested content is performed). After 5 seconds, the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, in the third embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs steps S4702, S4705, and S4705). By executing S4708, S4711, and S4714, if any of P02 to P05 is selected as the hold change pattern, the hold display or active display displayed in the effect suggestion display mode as the second display mode is performed. The display can be changed to “red” which is the first specific mode).
According to such a configuration, a sense of expectation for a specific mode can be increased.

  For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-168556 (paragraphs 0365-0368, FIG. 43) describes a change effect of a mode in which a white arrow flies, and a success pattern that changes to a special mode when a white arrow is inserted in a specific display. It is described that there is a failure pattern that does not change unless a white arrow is stuck on the specific display. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-168556, the change effect is monotonous, and there is a possibility that the interest in the case where the change effect is executed cannot be sufficiently improved. Then, the invention which concerns on means A1-A8 aims at providing the gaming machine which can improve the interest when a change effect is performed.

(Means A1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and a specific display capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, hold display or active display). After the specific display is displayed by the means (for example, the first hold storage display unit 9a, the second hold storage display unit 9b) and the first mode (for example, special hold; normal hold may be performed), the display of the specific display is performed. A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the mode (for example, a hold announcement effect accompanied by an action effect) (for example, a portion that executes steps S800A, S8004 to S8010, and S8106 to S8114 in the effect control microcomputer 100). The display modes of the specific display include at least a first mode and a second mode (for example, blue hold, red hold) having a high degree of advantage. Rarely, the change effect execution means can execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode after displaying the specific display in the first mode as the change effect (for example, FIG. 40D). , (E) and the change patterns 405 to 414 shown in FIGS. 41 (G) to (I), the special effect is changed from the special hold to the blue hold or the red hold. Change effect), it is possible to execute a change effect at a different rate after the change effect according to the execution mode of the executed change effect (for example, the change effect remains in special hold even if an action effect is executed in a hold announcement effect) If not, then the action effect is executed again and it is possible to change from special hold to blue hold or red hold, but the effect effect is executed in the hold announcement effect and the special hold is changed from blue to blue. When changed to hold or red hold, then action effect is not executed) be characterized. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest in the case where the change effect is executed.

(Means A2) In the means A1, the change effect execution means displays the specific display in the first mode (for example, special hold) as the change effect, and then changes the display mode of the specific display to the second mode (for example, blue hold). When the specific display is not changed to the third mode (for example, normal holding), an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (for example, normal holding) can be executed (for example, change patterns 31 and 32 shown in FIG. 40C). And a hold announcement effect based on the change patterns 401 to 404 shown in FIG. 41 (F) can be executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when performing the change effect.

(Means A3) In the means A2, the change effect execution means may be configured to display a specific display in a normal mode (for example, normal hold) as a first mode (see FIG. 52). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when performing the change effect.

(Means A4) In the means A2, the change effect execution means displays a specific display in a special mode (for example, special hold) different from the normal mode as the first mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40 (C) to (E)). In the case of executing the hold announcement effect based on the change patterns 31 to 36 shown and the change patterns 401 to 414 shown in FIG. 41, the special hold may be displayed once. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when performing the change effect.

(Means A5) In any one of the means A2 to the means A4, the change effect execution means may be an effect effect executed in a mode acting on the specific display displayed in the first mode (for example, FIG. 50 (5) It is possible to execute a change effect including the effect effects of the modes shown in FIGS. 50 (8), 51 (5), and 51 (8) (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the process selected in step S8010). By executing steps S8013 and S8105 in accordance with the table, the action effect is executed in the hold announcement effect.) The action effect can be executed a plurality of times with respect to the specific display displayed in the first mode (1). In the change patterns 402 and 404 shown in FIG. 41 (F), the special hold is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift, and then the second hold shift is performed. At the timing of the action, the action effect is executed, but the special effect remains unchanged, and the effect effect is executed at the timing of the third hold shift, and the special effect can be changed from the special hold to the normal hold.) Is also good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of performing a change effect.

(Means A6) In any one of the means A2 to A5, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the third mode changes to the second mode, the display of the specific display displayed in the first mode The advantage is higher than the case where the mode is changed to the second mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 41, a change pattern in which a red hold is finally displayed even when the special hold is returned to the normal hold (change pattern 411, change pattern 411). 414) is provided, and the change patterns 411 and 414 can be determined only when a super-reach big hit occurs). According to such a configuration, the sense of expectation for the specific display displayed in the third mode can be increased.

(Means A7) In any one of the means A2 to A6, a limiting means for limiting the number of specific displays displayed in the third mode (for example, in the second embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 (A portion for executing steps S6005X, S6007X, S6009, and S6010). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in the case of executing the change effect.

(Means A8) In any of the means A1 to A7, the specific display means includes at least a normal mode (for example, “white”) and a first specific mode (for example, “white”) having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode. Red)) and a second specific mode (for example, an effect mode display mode (a first special mode, a second special mode, a pseudo continuous mode, a SP mode)) that indicates the effect contents. The specific display can be displayed according to the display mode (for example, in the third embodiment, steps S3713, S3717, S3721, S3725, S3726, S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, and S4714 in the effect control microcomputer 100). Execution part), effect execution means (for example, In the third embodiment, by executing the same processing as steps S8013 and S8105 in the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the process table selected in the same processing as steps S8010 and S8011, special zone effects and pseudo zone And the specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, and then performs the effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode. At this time (for example, 5 seconds after the production of the suggested content is executed), the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, in the third embodiment). The effect control microcomputer 100 performs steps S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, and S4. By executing step 14, if any of P02 to P05 is selected as the pending change pattern, the pending display or the active display displayed in the effect suggestion display mode that is the second display mode is changed to the second display mode. (It can be changed to “red” which is one specific mode). According to such a configuration, a sense of expectation for a specific mode can be increased.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing the example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the example of a circuit structure of an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and a sound output board. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by a CPU on a main board. It is a flowchart which shows a 4ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the effect symbol prepared beforehand. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern type determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern type for outliers. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a design specification command. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of a hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation process at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the production control main processing which the production control CPU executes. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows a reservation notice effect setting process. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a final display mode determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a final display mode determination table. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a change pattern determination table. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a change pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation start process. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an action effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an action effect determination table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the effect symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a production mode of a reservation notice production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a production mode of a reservation notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the production | presentation mode of the reservation notice production | presentation in the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the production | presentation mode of the reservation notice production | presentation in the modification 2. It is a flow chart which shows a reservation notice production setting process in a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a final display mode determination table according to the second embodiment. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a final display mode determination table according to the second embodiment. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a change pattern determination table according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hold | maintenance display control processing in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hold | maintenance display control processing in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is an explanatory view showing a pending change pattern determination table, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a selection ratio of red pending. It is explanatory drawing which shows a change timing determination lottery table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first special suggestion execution lottery table, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a second special suggestion execution lottery table, and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo consecutive suggestion execution lottery table. (D) is an explanatory diagram showing an SP suggestion execution lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the effect symbol fluctuation | variation in 3rd Embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a display example in the case of displaying a hold display in the second special suggestion mode in the third embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a display example in the case of displaying a hold display in the second special suggestion mode in the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of hold | maintenance display and active display in each production mode selectable by a player. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the execution ratio of the suspension notice production in each production mode. It is a time chart which shows the example of the production performed in each production mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect which can be performed only in a lightning mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect which can be performed in fine mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect which can be performed in rain mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect which can be performed in a lightning mode.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape and provided in a game frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that is installed to be freely openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical components and the like are attached, and various components attached to them (game components to be described later). (Excluding the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 3. Below the hitting ball supply tray 3, a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing hitting balls are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure that includes a plate-like body constituting the board and various components attached to the plate-like body. On the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 4 is formed in a stick shape (rod shape) at a predetermined position (for example, a central portion of the lower tray) on the upper surface of the lower tray main body. A stick controller 122 that can be held and tilted in a plurality of directions (front, rear, left, and right) is attached. Note that the stick controller 122 is provided with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger or the like) in a state where the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with the operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button 121 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. 3). Further, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilt operation on the operation rod is provided in the lower portion of the stick controller 122 inside the main body of the lower plate. The stick controller 122 has a built-in vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  The member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 has a predetermined instruction operation performed by a player at a predetermined position (for example, above the stick controller 122) on the near side on the upper surface of the upper plate main body. A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship at the center of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the mounting position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be set to the position on the upper plate and the lower plate that is shifted to the left or right while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in the vertical position but may be in the left and right positional relationship.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for effecting variable display of effect symbols in synchronization with variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that variably displays effect symbols. The effect symbol display area has a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative symbols (for effect) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is performed on the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, a symbol other than the symbol which is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continues for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol becomes the same symbol). (Combination of symbols), stopped, rocked, scaled or deformed, or multiple symbols fluctuated synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of displayed symbols were switched. An effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is referred to as a reach effect. The reach state and the state thereof are referred to as a reach mode. Further, a variable display including a reach effect is called a reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, the result is “missing” and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol next to the effect symbol and a special symbol and a normal symbol described later. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for a first special symbol, in which a fourth symbol for a first special symbol is displayed in synchronization with a variable display of a first special symbol, which will be described later, A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable symbol display of the special symbol.

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are sometimes referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

  The fluctuation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state in which the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at predetermined time intervals with a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Synchronous means that the variable display starts and ends at the same time and the variable display period is the same.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display section) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers from 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9. On the right side of the effect display device 9 (on the right of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display (second variable display section) 8b for variably displaying a second special symbol as identification information. Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers from 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. In addition, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers from 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). May be.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, but the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display.

  In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening). 14 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of storages to be held is not 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) This is started based on the establishment of a state and a state in which the big hit game is not executed), and after a variable display time (variable time) elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The passing of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through an area that is previously determined as a winning area, such as a winning opening or a gate, and includes a concept that the game ball has entered (wins) the winning opening. It is. Deriving and displaying a display result means that a symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided.
The game ball that has won the first start winning port 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6, and is detected by the first start port switch 13a.

  Below the winning device having the first starting winning port (first starting port) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 in which a game ball can be won is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning port (second starting port) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6, and is detected by the second starting port switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning prize ball device 15 is opened, the game ball can enter the second starting winning port 14 (the starting winning is easily performed), and the state becomes advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning prize ball device 15 is in the open state, a game ball is more likely to win in the second starting winning opening 14 than in the first starting winning opening 13. Further, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning port 14. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning prize ball device 15 is in the closed state, game balls are more likely to win in the first starting winning opening 13 than in the second starting winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning prize ball device 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that it is difficult to win, but it is possible to win (that is, it is difficult for the game ball to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable prize ball device 15 is controlled to be in an open state, a game ball heading for the variable prize ball device 15 is extremely easy to win the second starting winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly below the effect display device 9. However, the distance between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening 13 is provided. 13 and the arrangement of nails around the first starting winning opening 13 makes it difficult for the game balls to be guided to the first starting winning opening 13, and the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is reduced. May be made higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning opening 13.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is provided a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls in the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the number of second hold storage. Is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lighted displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of illuminated displays is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, the number of effective winning balls in the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as a start memory or a start winning memory). ) Is provided with a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a composed of four displays. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lighted displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of illuminated displays is reduced by one.

  Further, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with a first hold storage display section 9a for displaying the first hold storage number and a second hold storage display section 9b for displaying the second hold storage number. . It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in the present embodiment, and for example, instead of the first hold storage display section 9a and the second hold storage display section 9b, the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number is used. An area (summed storage display unit) for displaying the total number (summed storage number) may be provided.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The effect symbol as the symbol is variably displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Also, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the user of the big hit. Is stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 1, below the variable winning prize ball device 15, a special variable winning prize ball device 20 that forms a large winning port is provided. The special variable winning ball device 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and a specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when is displayed, the large winning opening, which is a winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the symbol display 10 is generally implemented by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers from 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9. The small-sized display is formed, for example, in a square shape. The ordinary symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers from 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols). In addition, the ordinary symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like. For example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "O" and "X"). May be configured.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the ordinary symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is such that when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the player is in a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to the player (a state in which game balls can enter the second starting winning port 14). Changes to In the vicinity of the ordinary symbol display 10, there is provided an ordinary symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit of four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls passing through the gate 32. Each time a game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, each time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the symbol holding storage display 41 normally increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the ordinary symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be turned on is decreased by one. Furthermore, a probable change state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than the normal state (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of the fluctuation display of a special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) In this case, the probability that the stop symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10 hits the symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened are increased. Further, even in a time-saving state in which the fluctuation time of the symbol is not shortened (the gaming state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened), the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball that does not win is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that emit sound effects and voices as predetermined voice outputs are provided on the upper left and right sides and lower left and right sides of the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on a front frame is provided.

  The gaming machine has a hit ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to a player operating a hit ball operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch game balls into the game area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball fired from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 7 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and thereafter descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 13 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts the variable display (fluctuation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning in the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is increased by one on the condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When a game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 2), the variable display (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 8b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning in the second starting winning port 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

In this embodiment, when a probability change big hit occurs, the game state is shifted to the high probability state (probability change state), and the game ball is easily started and won (that is, the special symbol display 8a, 8b or the effect). A transition is made to a high base state, which is a game state controlled so that the execution condition of the variable display on the display device 9 is easily satisfied (in this embodiment, the state is reduced to a time reduction state).
Also, when the gaming state is shifted to the time saving state, the game state is shifted to the high base state. In the case of the high base state, for example, as compared with the case of not being in the high base state, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is extended. It is easy to win the starting prize.

  Note that, instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display device 10 shifts to the ordinary symbol probable state in which the probability that the stopped symbol hits the symbol is increased. This may cause a transition to a high base state. When the stop symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probable state, the probability that the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 hits the symbol is increased, and the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 being opened is increased. Therefore, if the state is shifted to the normal symbol change state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state in which starting winning is easy (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or when the stop symbol of the special symbol is a positive variation symbol, and the like, from the disadvantageous state for the player. The state changes to an advantageous state (a state in which the starting winning is easy). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that also includes changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Further, by shifting to the normal symbol time-saving state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10 is shortened, the normal symbol may be shifted to the high base state. In the normal symbol time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of the normal symbol hitting increases. Accordingly, as the frequency of winning the normal symbol increases, the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 being opened increases, and the winning prize ball device 15 becomes easy to win (high base state).

  Also, by shifting to the time-saving state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened, so that the fluctuation of the special symbol and the effect symbol starts. This increases the frequency (in other words, the speed of the storage of the hold memory becomes faster), and it is possible to reduce a situation in which an invalid start winning is generated. Therefore, an effective start winning is more likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility that a big hit game is played increases.

  Furthermore, by shifting to all of the above-mentioned states (open extended state, ordinary symbol positive change state, ordinary symbol time-saving state, and special symbol time-saving state), it becomes easy to start winning (to shift to the high base state). You may. In addition, by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extended state, ordinary symbol change state, ordinary symbol time-saving state, and special symbol time-saving state), it becomes easy to start winning (high base State). In addition, by shifting to only one of the above-described states (open extended state, ordinary symbol positive change state, ordinary symbol time-saving state, and special symbol time-saving state), the starting prize can be easily made (high). (Transition to the base state).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least the RAM 56 in addition to the CPU 56, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a built-in random number circuit 503 for generating hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by hardware circuits).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM serving as a non-volatile storage unit, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are preserved for a predetermined backup period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the backup power supply capacitor). You. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag or a probable change flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating a progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up by a power supply.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) hereinafter executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to the microcomputer mounted on a board other than the main board 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing. Based on the fact that the winning time is when the numerical data is read (extracted), the read numerical data has a random number generation function that becomes a random value.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for providing detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and a solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 forming a special winning opening in accordance with a command from the microcomputer 560 for game control. 31.

  The game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols, and a first special symbol holding storage. The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 that outputs an information output signal such as big hit information indicating occurrence of a big hit game state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (comprising an effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying the effect symbols is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35, and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control of the sound output.

  The effect control means is also connected to a trigger sensor 125 included in the stick controller 122, a tilt direction sensor unit 123, a vibrator motor 126, and a push sensor 124 included in the push button 120, as described later. (See FIG. 3), but is not shown in FIG.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, a microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information on effects such as effect symbol process flags. Note that the RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by a power supply. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal (from the main board 31) input via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103 in response to the effect control INT signal). The effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps the VRAM there. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The CGROM previously stores character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, data of persons, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect designs), and background image data. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in accordance with a command from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 allows the signal input from the relay board 77 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  The relay board 77 serves as a signal direction restricting means for passing a signal input from the main board 31 only in a direction toward the effect control board 80 (not passing a signal in a direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). Is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. In addition, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, so that the signal from the relay board 77 to the inside of the main board 31 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be provided outside the output port 571 (on the side of the relay board 77).

  The effect control CPU 101 inputs, via the input port 106, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected. The effect control CPU 101 inputs, via the input port 106, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected. The effect control CPU 101 inputs, via the input port 106, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123. . The effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  Further, effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to lamp driver board 35 via output port 105. The effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates a voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the audio synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706. The sound data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating a sound effect or a sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined effect period (for example, a change period of the effect symbol).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of a reset terminal to which a reset signal is input becomes high, and the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process from step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After the initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed. (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input through the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether or not data protection processing (for example, processing for stopping power supply such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine has been stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such a protection process has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

  After confirming that the processing at the time of power supply stop has been performed, the CPU 56 checks data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power is restored after an unexpected power outage or other power supply interruption, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, and the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, the initialization processing executed at the time of turning on the power other than the recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 returns the game state restoring process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in a work area (an area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data is set for an area of the work area that may be initialized. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that must not be initialized remain. The part that should not be initialized includes, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, time saving flag, etc.), and an area where the output state of the output port is stored (output port buffer). ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (normally big hit, probable big hit, sudden probable big hit, small hit, or miss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44). Then, control goes to a step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 13). You may make it. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may restart the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the stored variable time timer is restarted, and the variable display of the special symbol is restarted. When the value of the fluctuating time timer has timed out, a symbol confirmation designation command described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, the value of a special symbol process flag described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, the special symbol process processing is restarted from the process according to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Instead of always transmitting the display result designation command at the time of restoration from power failure, the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0. . If the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state is not the state and the display result designation command is not transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that it is not inside and the display result designation command is not transmitted.

  In this embodiment, whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored is confirmed using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, one of the backup flag and the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). In the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value is set. May be initialized. Alternatively, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball storage buffer, and a special symbol process flag, is initialized. The value is set.

  The CPU 56 also issues an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed initialization processing) for initializing a sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). Is transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, performs an initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 makes settings for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R, for example, by executing processing according to a random number circuit setting program.

  Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (Steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (Step S17) and the initial value random number update process (Step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt is enabled. It is set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when a big hit is not performed or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not performed. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value of a counter (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not a symbol is a hit. It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls a game display device, a variable prize ball device, a ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In this process, the count value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination is one round (the normal value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination) in the process of transmitting the command signal to control the other microcomputer, or the game machine control process. When the number of possible values has increased by the number between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interruption process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not the power-on signal has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off detection processing, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop processing for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and the states of these are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a, a second special symbol reservation storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). Regarding the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the ordinary symbol display 10, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process (step S26). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed in accordance with the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the special symbol process flag for controlling the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, a normal symbol process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to a normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, and probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, in response to a winning detection based on turning on of any one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the count switch 23, the payout control micro-mount mounted on the payout control board 37. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for performing a special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in an output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the ordinary symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the ordinary symbol in the output buffer for setting the ordinary symbol display control data according to the value of the ordinary symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“O” and “X”) of the fluctuation speed of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag relating to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set. At such a speed, every time 0.2 seconds elapse, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “○” and 0 indicating “×”) is switched. In addition, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby executing the effect display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10.

  Thereafter, an interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

  According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control processing corresponds to the processing of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt processing. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed in the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA-1 are used as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “outside” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of the reach PA1-2 is prepared. Among them, the non-reach PA1-1 is a fluctuation pattern that does not involve a reach and does not involve a pseudo-run or a sliding effect, and is a fluctuation pattern for a normal fluctuation that is not a shortened fluctuation (a fluctuation time of 12.50 seconds in this example). It is. The non-reach PA1-2 is a fluctuation pattern that does not involve a reach and does not involve a pseudo-run or a sliding effect, and is a fluctuation pattern for a shortened fluctuation that has a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation (in this example, the fluctuation time 2). .00 seconds).

  In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, the case where the non-reach is off does not include the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-run or the slide effect. May also be configured to provide a pseudo-run or a variation pattern accompanied by a slide effect.

  In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “outside” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 , Super PA3-1 to super PA3-2, and fluctuation patterns of super PB3-1 to super PB3-2. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-1 is used among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of the reach and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-run, the re-change is performed once. In addition, when the normal PB2-2 is used among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of the reach and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-run, the re-change is performed twice. Furthermore, when the super PA3-1 to the super PA3-2 are used among the fluctuation patterns which are used in the case of the reach and produce the effect of the pseudo-run, the re-variation is performed three times. In addition, the re-variation is to perform the variable display of the production symbol again after temporarily stopping the production symbol that is once out of the range from the start of the variable display of the production symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to Super PA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the fluctuation patterns of the special PG1-1 to the special PG1-3, the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-2 are the fluctuation patterns used when suddenly changing large hits or small hits. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden change is not a big hit or a small hit and produce a pseudo-run effect, the re-change is performed once. In addition, when the normal PB2-4 is used among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of the reach and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream, the re-change is performed twice. Furthermore, when the super PA3-3 to the super PA3-4 are used among the fluctuation patterns which are used in the case of the reach and produce the effect of the pseudo-run, the re-variation is performed three times. In addition, the fluctuation pattern of the special PG1-3 used in the case of the sudden change big hit or the small hit and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-run is re-changed once.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probable variable jackpot, suddenly variable jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): Determines the type (type) of the variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): Determines a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine initial value of random 4 (for determining random 4 initial value)

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the counter for generating the big hit type determination random number (1) and the normal symbol hit random number (4). Count up (1 addition). That is, these are the random numbers for determination, and the other random numbers are the random numbers for display (random 2, random 3) or the random numbers for initial value (random 5). In addition, a random number other than the above-mentioned random number may be used in order to enhance the gaming effect. Also, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware built in the game control microcomputer 560 (may be hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the big hit determination random number. Note that a software random number may be used as the big hit determination random number instead of the hardware random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The big hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal big hit determination table used in a normal state and a time saving state (that is, a gaming state that is not a probable change state), and a positive change big hit determination table used in a probable change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8A is set in the normal time big hit determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is the big hit determination value.

  FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used for performing the variation display of the second special symbol. (For the second special symbol). Each numerical value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and is set in FIG. 8C for the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol). Each numerical value described is set. The numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the random number for random determination (random R), which is shown in FIG. If any one of the jackpot determination values is matched, the special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (a normal jackpot, a probable big hit, and a sudden probable big hit described later). When the random number for big hit determination matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined that a small hit is to be made for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates a probability (ratio) of a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to shift to a big hit game state, but to determine whether to stop the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hitting game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, a case where a small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is started and the first special symbol change display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is started and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio of being determined as “small hit” is higher.

  FIGS. 8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the type of big hit using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 13 (that is, when the first special symbol change display is performed). It is a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a in the case. FIG. 8 (E) shows a case where the big hit type is determined by using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a big hit type determination table (for a second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b indicate that the type of the jackpot is "normal jackpot" or "normal jackpot" based on the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination when the variable display result is determined to be a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referred to to determine one of “probably big hit” and “suddenly big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, five determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). In contrast, one determination value is assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131b (ratio of 1/40). Will be suddenly determined as a jackpot). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is started and the first special symbol change display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is started and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio of being determined to be “suddenly variable jackpot” is higher. In addition, "sudden probability change big hit" is allocated only to the big hit type determination table 131a for the first special symbol, and "sudden probability change big hit" is not allocated to the big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol (ie, Only when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the "suddenly probable big hit" may be determined.)

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the jackpot types include “normal jackpot”, “probably large hit”, and “sudden probable big hit”. In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds is shown, but the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is shown in this embodiment. Not limited to For example, there may be provided a 10R probability variable jackpot for controlling a 10 round jackpot game, a 7R probability variable jackpot for controlling a 7 round jackpot game, and a 5R probability variable jackpot for controlling a 5 round jackpot game. In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the jackpot types are three types of “normal jackpot”, “probably variable jackpot” and “suddenly variable jackpot” is shown, but not limited to three types, for example, four or more types A jackpot type may be provided. Conversely, the number of big hit types may be less than three, for example, only two big hit types may be provided.

  The “normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state of 15 rounds and, after the jackpot game state ends, shifts to only the time reduction state (see step S167 described later). Then, after the shift to the time saving state, when the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the time saving state ends (see steps S168 and S137 to S140). Note that even before the variable display has been completed a predetermined number of times, even if the next big hit has occurred, the time saving state is ended (see step S132).

  The “probable change big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of 15 rounds and is shifted to the certain change state after the end of the big hit game state. The process proceeds to steps S169 and S170 described below. Then, the probable change state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  In addition, “suddenly probable big hit” means that the number of times the large winning opening is released is smaller than that of “normal big hit” or “probably big hit” (in this embodiment, two times of opening for 0.1 second are permitted). It is a big hit. In other words, when "suddenly changing probability big hit" is achieved, the state is controlled to the two round big hit gaming state. In addition, the opening time of the special winning jackpot per round is as long as 29 seconds for “normal jackpot” and “probable jackpot”, whereas the opening time of the winning jackpot per round is long for “sudden probability jackpot”. It is extremely short, 0.1 second, and it is hardly expected that a game ball will win a big winning opening during a big hit game. Then, in this embodiment, the game is shifted to the probability change state after the sudden change probability big hit game state is ended (in this embodiment, the game is shifted to the probability change state and also to the time saving state. Step S169, which will be described later) See S170). Then, the probable change state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  The mode of the sudden change big hit is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the number of times the special winning opening is opened may be set to 15 times (15 rounds), which is the same as a normal big hit or a sudden change big hit, and only the opening time of the special winning opening may be extremely short as 0.1 second.

  In this embodiment, even in the case of "small hit", the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the same control as in the big hit game state by "sudden probability change big hit" is performed. Will be Then, in the case of "small hit", the game state does not change and the game state before the "small hit" is maintained after the opening of the special winning opening twice. By doing so, it is impossible to recognize whether it is "suddenly changing big hit" or "small hit", and the interest of the game is improved. When all the big hit types are configured to be the probable big hits, the small hits need not be provided. In addition, when a small hit is provided when all of the big hit types are probabilistic big hits, a sudden probable big hit that is only shifted to the probable change state (high probability state) but does not accompany the time saving state (high base state) is made. (It is preferable that the opening pattern of the special winning opening is also the same in the case of the sudden change big hit and the small hit).

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and correspond to “normal jackpot”, “probably large hit”, and “suddenly probable large hit”. ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of the jackpot as the type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  FIGS. 9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the large hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C are used to change the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the jackpot type when the variable display result is determined to be a big hit symbol, and to provide a random number for the variation pattern type determination. It is a table that is referenced to determine one of a plurality of types based on (random 2).

  Each of the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for the variation pattern type determination, and includes normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, The determination value corresponding to any of the fluctuation pattern types of the super CA3-3, the special CA4-1, and the special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A used when the jackpot type is “normal jackpot” and FIG. 9B used when the jackpot type is “probable variable jackpot” The assignment of the determination values to the variation pattern types of the normal CA3-1 to the normal CA3-2 and the super CA3-3 differs between the large hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG.

  As described above, when comparing the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the jackpot type, the assignment of the determination value to each variation pattern type differs depending on the jackpot type. Further, a determination value is assigned to a different variation pattern type according to the big hit type. Therefore, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types according to the result of determining which of the plurality of types is the jackpot type, and it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in the case of “normal big hit” or “probable changing big hit”, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is between 150 and 251, it can be seen that the variable display accompanied by at least the super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, for the super reach jackpot, the fluctuation pattern type with pseudo run (variable pattern type including the fluctuation pattern of super PA3-3 and super PA3-4) and the fluctuation pattern type without pseudo run (super PB3-3, super (Variation pattern type including the variation pattern of PB3-4). In this case, in both the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A for the normal jackpot and the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132B for the probable jackpot, the variation pattern type with super reach and A variation pattern type that is not accompanied is assigned.

  Also, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table 132C used when the jackpot type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit types such as special CA4-1 and special CA4-2 are other than “suddenly probable big hit” A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is controlled to be "big hit" and the type of big hit is "suddenly variable big hit", the control to the suddenly variable big hit state is different from the case of controlling to the big hit state by the normal big hit or the variable big hit. It can be determined as the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D displays a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for the variation pattern type determination when the variable display result is determined to be a small hit symbol. Is a table that is referred to to determine one of the following. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 (D), a case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type when the small hit is determined. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing the variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C for loss. Among them, FIG. 10 (A) shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than 3. FIG. 10B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B that is used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is three or more. FIG. 10 (C) shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135C that is used when the gaming state is in the probability change state or the time saving state. The outlier variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C include a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that a variable display result is an outlier symbol. Is a table that is referenced to determine one of the following.

  In each of the variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a value of a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination, and non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2- 2, a determination value corresponding to one of the fluctuation pattern types of normal CA2-3 to normal CA2-4 and super CA2-5 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B), in this embodiment, when the game state is normal and the game state is normal, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is determined. Is 230 to 251, it can be understood that a variable display accompanied by at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of reserved storages.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is a normal state and the game state is a loss, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is between 1 and 89, the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation that does not involve at least the reach (and does not involve the effects such as the pseudo-run or the slide effect) is executed regardless of the total number of the reserved storages (the non-reach CA 2-1). It can be understood that the variation pattern type is the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 of the non-reach normal variation as shown in FIG. With such a table configuration, in the present embodiment, the determination tables (outlier variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B) include at least one of the variable display patterns other than the variable display pattern for reach (variable pattern with reach). Regarding a part, regardless of the number of rights (first reserved storage number, second reserved storage number, total reserved storage number) stored in the reserved storage means (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), The configuration is such that a common determination value (1 to 89 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) is assigned. The “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” is, for example, as described in the present embodiment, without a reach, without an effect such as a pseudo-run or a slide effect, and a variable display result. This is a variable display pattern (variation pattern) used when a big hit does not occur.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams showing the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B are used to determine the variation pattern when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit”, according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3) for use. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137A is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination result that the fluctuation pattern type is one of the normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and the super CA3-3, and the fluctuation pattern type is specially set. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table according to the result of the decision to use either CA4-1 or special CA4-2. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type. It includes data (judgment value) corresponding to one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of "big hit".

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. When the variable display result is determined to be “out”, the outlier variation pattern determination table 138A, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type, is based on a random number for random variation determination (random 3). It is a table referred to in order to determine a variation pattern to any of a plurality of types. The outlier variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the examples shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of an effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponds to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. Note that “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100, when receiving the command 80XX (H), controls the effect display device 9 to start the variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and the type of big hit. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display results of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), and thus the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol change designation command) indicating that variable display (change) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the symbol confirmation designation command, it ends variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is Effect control command (initialization designation command: transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started) Power-on specification command). Command 9200 (H) is This is an effect control command (power failure restoration designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. The game control microcomputer 560 includes: When power supply to the gaming machine is started, If the data is stored in the backup RAM, Send the power failure recovery designation command, If not, Send the initialization specification command.

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands for displaying a fanfare screen, that is, for specifying the start of a big hit game (big hit start specifying command: fanfare specifying command). In this embodiment, a big hit start specifying command or a small hit / suddenly variable big hit start specifying command is used depending on the type of big hit. More specifically, a big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the case of "normal big hit" or "probable change big hit", and in the case of "sudden positive change big hit" or "small hit", / A sudden change big hit start designation command (A002 (H)) is used. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit the fanfare designation command for sudden change big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send the fanfare designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command during opening of the special winning opening) indicating that the special winning opening is open at the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command after opening the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening at the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, for specifying the end of the big hit game (big hit end specifying command: ending 1 specifying command). Note that the big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when a big hit game based on “normal big hit” or “probable big hit” is ended. The command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden change big hit game. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for sudden change big hit end designation when sudden change is a big hit, but not to send an ending designation command for small hit. Is also good.

  The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command for specifying background display when the gaming state is in the probable change state (probability change state background specification command). Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (a time-saving state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the time-saving state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reservation storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first reservation storage number has increased by one. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (a second reserved storage number addition designation command) for designating that the second reserved storage number has been increased by one. The command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first subtraction storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first reservation storage number has decreased by one. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (a second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second reserved storage number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, as the pending storage information, an effect control command (first suspension storage number addition designation) indicating that the suspension storage number has increased or decreased, respectively, for the first suspension storage number and the second suspension storage number. Command, second reserved storage number addition designation command, first reserved storage number subtraction designation command, second reserved storage number subtraction designation command), the form of the reserved storage information is shown in this embodiment. In addition to the information shown in the above, for example, the storage information in the following mode may be transmitted.

(1) Only one command is transmitted as the pending storage information, and in that one command, which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage is increased is specified, and the number of the pending storage that has increased is specified. (The first number of reserved storages or the second number of reserved storages) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

(2) Only one command is transmitted as the pending storage information, and in that one command, which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage is increased is specified, and the total number of pending storage is indicated by the EXT data. It may be configured to be set as a transmission.

(3) As the reserved storage information, which of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 has been designated as the winning start (whether the first reserved storage or the second reserved storage has been increased) is designated. In addition to transmitting the effect control commands (the first start winning appointment designation command and the second start winning appointment designation command), a reservation storage number designation command for designating the number of reservation storages is transmitted separately from the command. The total number of reserved storages may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

(4) As the reserved storage information, which of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 has been designated as a winning start (whether the first reserved storage or the second reserved storage has been increased) is designated. In addition to transmitting the effect control commands (the first start winning appointment designation command and the second start winning appointment designation command), a reservation storage number designation command for designating the number of reservation storages is transmitted separately from the command. The increased reserved storage number (first reserved storage number or second reserved storage number) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

  The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning-time determination result designation command) indicating the content of the winning-time determination result. Among them, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol designating command) indicating the result of the determination of the type of a big hit, whether or not a big hit, a small hit, among the winning determination results. is there. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) as to which of the determination value ranges of the variation pattern type determination random number is included in the prize-winning determination results. (Fluctuation category command).

  In this embodiment, in a prize-winning effect process (see FIG. 22) described later, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not a big hit, a small hit, or a big hit at the time of starting prize. Then, it is determined which value range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within which determination value range. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating a big hit type is set, and control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of the determination value as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit, and recognize the type of the big hit based on the value set in the symbol designating command. Based on the fluctuation category command, if the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is a predetermined judgment value, the fluctuation pattern type can be recognized.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, EXT data is set according to whether a big hit or a small hit and the type of the big hit, and a symbol designating command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined in the prize-winning effect process that will be described later that it is “out”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) in which EXT data is set to “00 (H)”. Further, for example, when it is determined to be “normal big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which EXT data is set to “01 (H)”. In addition, for example, when it is determined that “probably large hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which EXT data is set to “02 (H)”. Further, for example, when it is determined to be “suddenly large change big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (symbol 4 designating command) in which EXT data is set to “03 (H)”. Further, for example, when it is determined to be “small hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which EXT data is set to “04 (H)”. The EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, the data to be read can be shared when setting the symbol designation command and when setting the display result designation command.

  FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which game state, which display result of the special symbol or effect symbol will be displayed, and the random number Is set in the EXT data according to which of the determination values is determined to fall within the range of the determination value, and the fluctuation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is a normal state and a loss at the time of the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 89 in step S232 of the winning effect production process described later. Determine whether or not. If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which EXT data is set to “00 (H)”. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 1 to 89 regardless of the total number of stored suspensions. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the fluctuation pattern type is the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the reception of the fluctuation category 1 command. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which EXT data is set to “01 (H)”. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 100 to 169, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 3 command in which EXT data is set to “02 (H)”. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which EXT data is set to “03 (H)”. Next, when the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 6 command in which EXT data is set to “05 (H)”. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which EXT data is set to “06 (H)”. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-5 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of stored storages. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the variation pattern type is at least super CA2-5 based on the reception of the variation category 7 command.

  Note that the thresholds 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-mentioned fluctuation categories belong to the outliers shown in FIGS. This is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of the range of the determination value assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table. This is the same for the subsequent fluctuation categories 8 to 9, 21 to 29, and is assigned to each of the fluctuation pattern types in the fluctuation pattern type determination tables shown in FIGS. 9A to 9D and 10C. The threshold value used for the category determination is derived by picking up a value that may be a boundary of the determined determination value range.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the probability change state or the time reduction state and loses at the time of the start winning, the CPU 56 first sets the value of the variation pattern type determination random number to 1 in step S232 of the winning effect production process described later. 219 is determined. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the non-reach CA 2-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation in which the EXT data is set to “07 (H)”. Send a category 8 command. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 220 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is Super CA2-5), the CPU 56 sets “08 (H)” in the EXT data. Send the fluctuation category 9 command.

  In addition, even when the gaming state is the probable change state or the time saving state, the change pattern type of the super CA2-5 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-5 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when executing the processing of step S232 of the processing of the prize-winning effect described later, if it is out of place, the common determination processing may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the process of determining the game state in step S226 can be omitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a “normal big hit” is made at the time of the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 in step S232 of the winning effect production process described later. Is determined. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which EXT data is set to “10 (H)”. 21 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2), the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data. A fluctuation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 150 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is Super CA3-3), the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data. A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a “probable change big hit” occurs at the time of the start winning, in step S232 of the winning effect production process described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38. Is determined. If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 (that is, if the variation pattern type is the normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which EXT data is set to “13 (H)”. 24 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the normal CA3-2), the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data. A fluctuation category 25 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is Super CA3-3), the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data. A fluctuation category 26 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a probability change big hit suddenly occurs at the time of the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 100 in step S232 of the winning effect production process described later. Is determined. If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 100 (that is, if the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which EXT data is set to “16 (H)”. 27 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the special CA 4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which EXT data is set to “17 (H)”. 28 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit occurs at the time of the start winning, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 29 command in which EXT data is set to “18 (H)”.

  It should be noted that the total number of pending storages is not always the same when the prize determination is made at the time of the start prize and when the fluctuation display is actually started, so the fluctuation indicated by the prize determination result designation command is not always the same. In some cases, the pattern type does not match the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, a common determination value is assigned to at least the non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5, and super CA3-3 variation patterns regardless of the total number of pending storages. (See FIGS. 9 and 10), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, a hold announcement effect, which is a kind of a look-ahead announcement effect, is executed based on the result of a prize-winning determination that the variation pattern type is the non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5, or super CA3-3. You. It should be noted that the fluctuation category commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (specifically, a fluctuation category 1 command, Only the fluctuation category 7 command, the fluctuation category 23 command, and the fluctuation category 26 command) may be transmitted, and the fluctuation category command may not be transmitted in the case of the winning determination result of the other fluctuation pattern types. Further, when it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than the non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5, and super CA3-3, a fluctuation category command indicating that the fluctuation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted. Good.

  Note that the "prefetch notice effect" is a notice effect that is executed before the start of the variable display targeted for the notice effect. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when it is determined that a hold announcement effect, which is a kind of a look-ahead advance effect, is determined when a start winning is generated, the hold display is displayed in a normal mode (white circle display in this example). In this case, a hold announcement effect that is finally changed to a special display mode different from the above (in this example, a blue or red circle display) is executed. Note that in this embodiment, when a hold announcement effect is performed, the hold display does not directly change from the normal mode to the special display mode, but the hold display is a special display mode (in this example, a triangle display or a rectangular display). In some cases, an effect effect is executed at the timing of a subsequent hold shift, and an effect is performed in which the hold display of the notice target changes to any one of the special display modes. Hereinafter, the hold display displayed in the normal mode is also referred to as “normal hold”, and the hold display displayed in the special display mode is also referred to as “special hold”. In addition, among the special display modes, the hold display displayed in blue display color is also called “blue hold”, and the hold display displayed in red display color is also called “red hold”.

  In addition, the production mode of the look-ahead notice effect is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, and in addition to the hold notice effect, for example, as a look-ahead notice effect, a special display result such as a chance eye pattern is continuously obtained over a plurality of fluctuations. Various effects, such as executing an effect of stopping and displaying, performing an effect of counting down over a plurality of changes, executing an effect of changing an effect mode in a manner in which a background screen changes, and the like. Can be considered.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is described in which the hold announcement effect is executed so that only the display mode of the hold display can be changed. In a gaming machine configured to be able to display an active display corresponding to, even when the suspended display is exhausted and the variable display of the notice target is being executed, the display mode of the active display can also be changed. You may comprise.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. I do.

  FIGS. 18 and 19 are flowcharts showing an example of a program for a special symbol process (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, if the first starting port switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first starting winning port 13 is turned on, that is, the starting to the first starting winning port 13 is performed. If a winning has occurred, a first start-up switch passing process is executed (steps S311 and S312). Further, the CPU 56 determines that the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 is on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred. Then, the second starting port switch passing process is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processing in steps S300 to S310 is as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is ready to start the variable display of the special symbol, the microcomputer 560 checks the storage number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer (the total number of hold storages). The number of stored numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. If the count value of the total reserved storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a big hit, a big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game ends.

  Variation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, a fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the time when the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) in the fluctuation pattern is determined by the fluctuation time of the special symbol variable display. Decide to do so. In addition, control is performed to transmit a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a fluctuation time timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol change processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control for transmitting the designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag has become 4, as described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data (see FIG. 30), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control process of step S22 according to the setting content of the output buffer.

  Big winning opening pre-processing (step S305): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the special winning opening opening pre-processing, control for opening the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter for counting the number of game balls entering the special winning opening) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control to transmit the special winning opening opening command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening processing is set by a timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. (In this example, 6). The pre-winning opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process is also a process of starting a big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for each round of the special winning opening opening designation command, a different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game, Transmits a special winning opening opening designation command (A10A (H)) designating round 10.

  Big winning opening processing (step S306): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the processing during opening of the special winning opening, processing for confirming establishment of a closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, while performing control to transmit the designation command after the jackpot is released to the effect control microcomputer 100, and when all rounds have been completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, it is updated to 7).

  Big hit end processing (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag) indicating a game state is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control for opening the big winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter for counting the number of game balls entering the special winning opening) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. The execution time of the special winning opening process is set by a timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. The small hit opening pre-processing is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. However, when the first opening during the small hit game is started, the small hit opening pre-processing is performed for the small hit game. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit opening processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. When all the openings have been completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. The control for making the effect control microcomputer 100 perform display control for notifying the player that the small hitting game state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passage processing in steps S312 and S314. FIG. 20A is a flowchart showing the first starting port switch passage processing in step S312. FIG. 20B is a flowchart showing the second starting port switch passage processing in step S314.

  First, with reference to FIG. In the first startup port switch passage process executed when the first startup port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 first determines whether the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, It is checked whether the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting one reserved storage number is 4) (step S1211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S1212A), and increases the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 21) (step S1214A). . In the process of step S1214A, a random R (hard hit determination random number) which is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) which is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, the random number for random determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start opening switch passage process (at the time of starting winning) and is stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted when the first special symbol starts to change. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold storage buffer) for storing a random number or the like corresponding to hold storage. As shown in FIG. 21, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of first reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer include a random R (hard hit determination random number) as a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) as a software random number, A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. Note that the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the gaming state is the time-saving state is set (step S1215A). If it has been set, the process moves directly to step S1220A. If the time reduction flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S1216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is a big hit game state or a small hit game state), the CPU 56 proceeds directly to step S1220A.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, a prize-winning effect process is performed in which a fluctuation display result and a fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start prize is subsequently executed are determined at the time of the start prize (step). S1217A). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect effect processing (step S1218A), and transmits the variable category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The control is performed (step S1219A). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220A).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218A and S1219A, the CPU 56 always specifies the symbol every time the first winning prize port 13 is started and the prize effect processing of step S1217A is executed. The command and the variation category command are both transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Also, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218A to S1220A, a symbol is designated when a winning prize is generated in the first starting prize port 13 and the prize effect processing of step S1217A is performed. A set of three commands, a command, a fluctuation category command, and a first reserved storage number addition designation command, is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

  However, if it is determined in step S1215A or step S1216A that the result of step S1215A is "Y", the CPU 56 does not execute the prize-winning stage effect processing in step S1217A. In step S1220A, the CPU 56 controls to transmit only the first hold storage number addition designation command. Is performed, and control for transmitting a winning determination result designation command (symbol designation command, variable category command) is not performed. When the prize-winning effect processing in step S1217A is not executed, a prize-winning determination result specification in which a value (for example, “FF (H)”) indicating that the prize-winning determination result cannot be specified is set as the EXT data. Commands (symbol designating command, variable category command) may be transmitted.

  Also, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of step S1215A, if there is a start winning at the first starting winning opening 13, the winning of step S1217A is performed only when the gaming state is the normal state. A time production process is executed. Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of step S1216A, if there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening 13, the step S1217A is performed only when the game is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. At the time of winning. Note that the process may not be shifted to step S1217A only in the case of the big hit gaming state, and may be shifted to step S1217A in the case of the small hit gaming state to execute the prize winning effect process.

  Further, in this embodiment, the control of opening the special winning opening for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after the start of the big hit is notified of the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state). This is a state in which the opening of the special winning opening in the final round is completed and the end of the big hit is notified. Specifically, this is a state in which the processes from the special winning opening opening process (see step S305) to the big hit end process (see step S307) in the special symbol process process are being executed.

  Next, the second starting port switch passage processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the second startup port switch passage process executed when the second startup port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved port number). It is checked whether the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the storage number is 4) (step S1211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S1212B), and increases the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S1213B). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in a storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 21) (step S1214B). . In the process of step S1214B, a random R (hard hit determination random number) which is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1) which is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It is to be noted that the random number for random determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start opening switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and is stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the change of the second special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process (step S1217B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect effect process (step S1218B), and transmits the variable category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The control is performed (step S1219B). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220B).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218B and S1219B, the CPU 56 always enters the second starting winning opening 14 and executes the winning effect processing of step S1217B. The command and the variation category command are both transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Also, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218B to S1220B, a symbol is designated when a winning prize is generated in the second starting winning port 14 and the prize-winning effect processing of step S1217B is performed. A set of three commands, a command, a fluctuation category command, and a command for specifying the addition of the second reserved storage number, is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

  In the second opening switch passing process, the same process as that in step S1215A is performed. If the time reduction state (including the case where the time reduction state is controlled together with the probability change state), the prize-winning effect processing in step S1217B is executed. It may not be done. In other words, the winning effect process of step S1217B may be executed only in the normal state, and the symbol designating command and the variable category command may be transmitted. In this embodiment, as described later, when the time saving state is set, the prefetch notice effect is executed only for the second hold memory. The effect processing is executed to transmit the symbol designation command and the fluctuation category command, and in the normal state, the winning effect processing of step S1217B is not executed and the symbol designation command and the fluctuation category command are not transmitted. Is also good.

  Also, in the second starting port switch passing process, the same process as step S1216A may be performed, and if a big hit game is being played, the prize winning effect process of step S1217B may not be executed. In addition, in the second starting port switch passing process, the prize effect process of step S1217B may not be executed (that is, the prize determination process may not be executed for the second special symbol). . With such a configuration, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed for a certain period, it is possible to reliably prevent the pre-read notice effect from being interrupted halfway due to a short fluctuation time.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing of steps S1217A and S1217B. In the prize-winning effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the random number (random R) for jackpot determination extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the jackpot determination value in the normal state shown in the left column of FIG. It is checked whether they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing when the change of the special symbol and the effect symbol is started, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing to be described later, the big hit type is determined, and the variation pattern is set in the variation pattern setting processing. Alternatively, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is started, By executing the prize-winning effect processing, it is confirmed in advance whether a big hit or a small hit or not, and which judgment value range of the random number for judging the type of the big hit and the variation pattern type is determined. By doing so, the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type are predicted in advance before the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is executed, and as described later, the microcomputer for effect control based on the determination result at the time of winning. 100 executes a hold announcement effect for announcing that a big hit or a super reach will be made during the change display of the effect symbol.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the normal big hit determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 sets a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is in the high probability state (probability state). It is confirmed whether or not it has been performed (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the random number (random R) for jackpot determination extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is determined whether or not matches (step S222). Note that a plurality of variable displays may be executed between the time when it is determined in step S221 that the winning change is made at the start winning prize and the time when the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed between the time when it is determined in step S221 whether or not the winning change is made at the time of the start winning and the time when the change display based on the start winning is actually started (for example, the start of the change). If a probability variable hit or a sudden probability change occurs before, the normal state is changed to the variable state.) Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of change (see step S61 described later) do not always match. In order to prevent such inconsistency, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and a determination on the start winning is made based on the game state after the change. Is also good.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the big hit determination value at the time of the probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 compares the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with FIG. ) And (C) are compared with each other to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, if there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening 13 (in the case where the winning effect processing of step S1217A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hit determination table (the first hit winning table) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for the special symbol. In addition, when there is a winning start in the second starting winning opening 14 (when executing the winning effect processing of step S1217B), a small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. It is determined whether or not the value matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, in step S225, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the probable change state and whether or not the game is in the time saving state (specifically, whether or not the probable change flag and the time reduction flag are set). Is determined. It should be noted that a plurality of times are required between the time when it is determined whether or not the winning change is made in step S225 and whether or not the time saving state is reached after the start winning prize, until the start of the variable display based on the winning prize. Variable display may be performed. For this reason, the game state changes between the time the start winning prize is confirmed in step S225 and whether or not the time saving state has been reached, and before the fluctuation display based on the start winning prize is actually started. (For example, when a certain-variable big hit or a sudden big-change big hit occurs before the start of the change, the state changes from the normal state to the certain-change state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the time of the start winning is not always the same as the gaming state determined at the start of the change (see step S61 described later). In order to prevent such inconsistency, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and a determination on the start winning is made based on the game state after the change. Is also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold value for out-of-position according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the value is greater than the threshold, the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination falls in any of the determination value ranges. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the fluctuation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is the probable change state or the time saving state. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 219, and if the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 (that is, if it is 1 to 219). Determines that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not equal to or less than the threshold value 219 (that is, if it is 220 to 251), it is determined that “08 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of reserved storages. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 89, and when it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 89 (that is, 1 to 89). Determines that “00 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is less than or equal to the threshold value 99 (that is, if it is 90 to 99), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 169 (that is, if it is 100 to 169), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is equal to or less than the threshold value 199 (that is, if it is 170 to 199), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 214 (that is, if it is 200 to 214), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 229 (that is, if it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 229 (that is, if it is 230 to 251), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the example of the threshold determination described above, the thresholds are determined to be 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in ascending order of the threshold value. It does not fall within the range below the order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is equal to or less than the threshold value 89, when determining whether or not the threshold value is equal to or less than the threshold value 99, the value does not fall within the range of 1 to 89 which is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. Is determined to be within the range. Also, in this embodiment, the case where the threshold value is determined to be 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 in ascending order is shown, but conversely, the threshold value is determined to be 229, 214, 199, 169, 99 and 89 may be determined. The same applies to the case where the determination is made using the other threshold values described below.

  The threshold value in the normal state may be always set without performing the determination of the game state in step S225. Even with such a configuration, since the range of the determination value is at least common for the variation pattern type of “non-reach loss” and the variation pattern type of “super-reach loss”, It can be determined whether or not “out-of-reach” or “out-of-reach out” occurs.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 sends the EXT data “04 (H)” indicating “small hit” to the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold value for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 251. In step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 251 (1 to 251). It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the fluctuation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the big hit determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the big hit type based on the big hit type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B. Is determined (step S229). In this case, if there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening 13 (in the case of executing the winning effect processing of step S1217A), the CPU 56 determines the big hit type determination table (first It is determined whether the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “probably variable jackpot” or “suddenly variable jackpot” by using the special symbol 131a. In addition, when there is a start winning in the second starting winning opening 14 (when executing the winning effect process of step S1217B), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. Using the 131b, it is determined whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probably variable big hit” or “sudden positive big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data according to the jackpot type determination result in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, if it is determined that the "normal jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data "01 (H)" indicating the "normal jackpot" in the symbol designating command. If it is determined that the "big hit" is reached, the CPU 56 sets the EXT data "02 (H)" indicating the "big hit" in the symbol designating command. Further, when it is determined that the "sudden probability big hit" is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data "03 (H)" indicating the "sudden probability big hit" to the symbol designation command.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each big hit threshold value according to the big hit type determined in step S229 (step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when it is determined to be “normal big hit”. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74, and when the value is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Determines that “10 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 149 (that is, if it is 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not equal to or smaller than the threshold value 149 (that is, if it is 150 to 251), it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  In addition, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that “probably large hit”, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 38 and 79. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is equal to or less than the threshold value 38, and when the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Determines that “13 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is equal to or less than 79 (that is, if it is 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, if it is 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that “suddenly variable big hit”, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 100. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 100. Determines that “16 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not less than 100 (that is, if it is 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B to determine the value of the variation pattern type determination random number. It is determined whether the value falls within the range of the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set. Using the determination table, the range of the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type and which variation pattern type may be determined.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data according to the determination result in the variable category command (Step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “08 (H)” or “10 (H)” as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 according to which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. (H) to 18 (H) are set in the EXT data of the variable category command.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is uniformly determined even when it is determined that a large hit or a small hit is determined in the winning determination. If it is determined that a big hit or a small hit occurs, the determination of the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number may not be performed. Then, a symbol designating command indicating that it has been determined at the time of a prize when it is a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted, and a change category command comprehensively indicating that the change pattern type is a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . And, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 does not specifically indicate which variation pattern type is used, but the variation that is comprehensively indicated as one of the jackpot variation pattern types is shown. On the basis of the reception of the category command, a hold announcement effect described later may be executed.

  FIGS. 23 and 24 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 checks the value of the total number of reserved storages (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the sum reserved storage number is 0, if the customer wait demonstration designation command has not been transmitted yet, control is performed to transmit the customer wait demonstration designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. Note that, for example, upon transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing is executed after the next timer interrupt after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completed flag is set and the customer waiting demonstration is repeated. What is necessary is just to control not to transmit a demonstration designation command. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag may be reset when the next special symbol change display is started.

  If the total number of reserved storages is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second number of reserved storages is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter is 0. If the second reserved number is not 0, the CPU 56 sets a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed on the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed on the second special symbol). Is set to indicate "second" (step S53). If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, if only the first reserved storage number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by performing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed such that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol. It should be noted that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed and displayed in the order of winning in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, for example, without being limited to the mode shown in this embodiment. You may comprise.

  In the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority as shown in this embodiment, the random number (random R) for determining a big hit is determined in the prize production process shown in FIG. Only the process of comparing the value with the jackpot determination value in the low probability state may be executed, and may not be compared with the jackpot determination value in the probable change state (specifically, only the process of step S220 is executed. , The processing of steps S221 and S222 may not be performed). With such a configuration, in a case where the change display of the second special symbol is performed with priority, the jackpot determination result at the time of winning determination and the jackpot determination result at the start of the actual change are determined. Deviation can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (Step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 sets each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by one, and sets the value of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by one, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved storage number in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each of the stored random numbers is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each of the symbols stored in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4). The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved number of storage = n-1. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers (or the respective second reserved storage numbers) are always the first reserved storage number (or (The number of second reserved storages) = 1, 2, 3, and 4.

  Then, the CPU 56 reduces the value of the total number of reserved storages by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the current game state (step S60). In this case, if the probable change flag indicating the probable change state is set, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the probable change state background designation command. In addition, when only the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set and the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the time saving state background designation command. If neither the probable change flag nor the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control for transmitting a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets an address of a command transmission table (preset in the ROM for each command) according to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, a background designation command, a variation pattern command, a display result designation command, a hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold storage number subtraction) are issued for each timer interrupt. The command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the order of the designation command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command. Specifically, when changing the special symbol, a background designating command is transmitted first, a variation pattern command is transmitted after a lapse of 4 ms, a display result specifying command is transmitted after a lapse of 4 ms, and after a lapse of 4 ms. A reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted. At the start of the special symbol variation, a symbol variation designation command (first symbol variation designation command, second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt command as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is to be performed on the first starting winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is to be performed on the first special symbol. ", Or data indicating" second "indicating that processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is," second "indicating that processing is to be performed on the second special symbol. Data is set to the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be shared between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out a random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area, and executes the big hit determination module. Note that, in this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination extracted in step S1214A of the first startup port switch passage process and step S1214B of the second startup port switch passage process and stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer in advance. The random number is read and a big hit is determined. The big hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value or a small hit determination value (see FIG. 8) with the big hit determination random number, and executes a process of deciding to determine a big hit or a small hit if they match. It is a program to do. In other words, it is a program for executing the processing of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  The big hit determination process is configured such that the probability of a big hit is higher when the gaming state is in the probable change state than in the non-probable change state (normal state or time saving state). More specifically, a large-hit-judgment-judgment table (a table in the ROM 54 in which a numerical value on the right side of FIG. 8A is set in the ROM 54) in which a large number of big-hit determination values are set in advance, There is provided a normal-time jackpot determination table (a table in the ROM 54 in which numerical values on the left side in FIG. 8A are set) which are set to be smaller than the time-and-big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is the probable change state. When the gaming state is the probable change state, the CPU 56 performs a process of determining a big hit using the probable change time big hit determination table, and the game state is normally set. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random R) matches any one of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. When it is determined that a big hit is to be made (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. In addition, to determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to determine whether or not the stop symbol in the special symbol display is a big hit symbol. But also.

  It should be noted that whether or not the current gaming state is in the probable change state is determined by whether or not the probable change flag is set. The certainty change flag is set when the game state is shifted to the certainty change state, and is reset when the certainty change state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “probably variable jackpot” or “suddenly variable jackpot”, and is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. Then, after the big hit game ends, it is reset when the next big hit occurs.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 checks the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine whether to make a small hit. When the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. . If it is determined that the small hit is made (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match any of the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of the range, the process directly proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit. Then, a big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used for determining the big hit type to be one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the first special symbol big hit type determination table 131a shown in FIG. 8D. When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (E).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select the type (“normal jackpot”, “probable change”) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "suddenly changed big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the big hit type extracted in step S1214A of the first starting port switch passing process and step S1214B of the second starting port switch passing process and stored in the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer in advance. Read the random number for use and determine the type of jackpot. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the probability that sudden change jackpots are suddenly selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the data indicating the determined big hit type in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “01” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “probable change jackpot”, “02” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, When the jackpot type is “suddenly changing big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the jackpot type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). More specifically, if neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is a missing symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of the big hit symbols “1”, “3”, and “7” is determined as the special symbol stop symbol according to the result of the determination of the big hit type. In other words, if the jackpot type is determined to be "Suddenly probable big hit", "1" is determined to be the special symbol stop symbol, and if it is determined to be "Normal big hit", "3" is determined to be the special symbol stop symbol. However, if it is determined to be "probable change big hit", "7" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is determined first and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is determined is shown. The present invention is not limited to the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on the jackpot type determination random number, and a corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. You may comprise so that a type may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 determines that the change pattern type is one of a plurality of types, as the big hit change pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9A ) To (C)) (step S92). Then, control goes to a step S100.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S93). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 determines that the variation pattern type is one of a plurality of types, as a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D ) Is selected (step S94). Then, control goes to a step S100.

  If the small hit flag has not been set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time saving flag indicating that it is in the time saving state has been set (step S95). Note that the time reduction flag is set when the game state is shifted to the certain change state or the time reduction state, and is reset when the time reduction state ends. Specifically, when it is determined to be "normal big hit", the time saving flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. In addition, it is reset when a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) of the variable display is finished after the big hit game is finished. It should be noted that the time-saving flag is reset even before the change display of the predetermined number of times is completed, even when the next big hit occurs. If it is determined to be a "probably large hit" or "suddenly variable big hit", the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, when the next big hit occurs, the time saving flag is reset together with the probability change flag.

  If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of reserved storages is 3 or more (step S96). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 determines that the variation pattern type is one of a plurality of types, as the table used to determine the variation pattern type for a loss 135A ( 10 (see FIG. 10A) (step S97). Then, control goes to a step S100.

  If the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 determines whether the variation pattern type is one of a plurality of types, as the outlier variation pattern type determination table. 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S98). Then, control goes to a step S100.

  If the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is in the probable change state or the time reduction state (in this embodiment, when the game state is shifted to the probable change state, the time reduction state is always set) (See steps S169 and S170), and if Y is determined in step S95, there is a case in which the state is controlled to be the probable change state or a case where only the time saving state is controlled). Is selected as a table to be used for deciding one of a plurality of types (step S99). Then, control goes to a step S100.

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S95 to S99, if the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of storages to be retained is 3 or more, the variation for out-of-position shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. When the gaming state is the probable change state or the time saving state, the loss variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, the non-reach CA 2-2 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S100 described later. If the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-2 is determined, the variation is determined in the process of step S102. Non-reach PA1-2 of shortened variation is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the probable change state or the time saving state, or when the total number of stored suspensions is 3 or more, the fluctuation display of the shortened fluctuation may be performed. In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortened variation used in the probable variation state or the time saving state (see FIG. 10C), and a variation pattern type determination table for shortened variation based on the number of retained storages (see FIG. 10 (B) is a different table, but a common table may be used as the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortened fluctuation.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out the random number 2 (the random number for determining the variation pattern type) from the random number buffer area (the first storage buffer or the second storage buffer) and selects the random number 2 in the processing of step S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S100).

  Next, based on the result of the determination of the variation pattern type in step S100, the CPU 56 determines whether the variation pattern is one of a plurality of types, as a hit variation pattern determination table 137A, 137B (see FIG. 11). ), And selects one of the out-of-place variation pattern determination tables 138A (see FIG. 12) (step S101). Further, the random pattern 3 is read out from the random number buffer area (the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer) (variation pattern determination random number), and by referring to the change pattern determination table selected in the process of step S101, the change pattern is determined. Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S102). In the case where the random number 3 (the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning prize, the CPU 56 sets the random number counter for the fluctuation pattern determination for generating the random number for the fluctuation pattern determination (random 3). , The fluctuation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol change designation command. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol change designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting an effect control command (a fluctuation pattern command) corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission processing, the CPU 56 transmits any one of the display result 1 to the display result 5 designation effect control commands (see FIG. 13) according to the determined big hit type, small hit, and missing. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process moves to step S116. If the big hit flag is set and the big hit type is “normal big hit”, control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). In addition, it can be determined whether or not it is "normal big hit" by confirming whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "01". . When the type of the big hit is “probably variable big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). In addition, whether it is "probable change big hit" can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02". . If it is neither "normal big hit" nor "probably big hit" (that is, if it is "sudden big hit"), the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 4 designation command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S117). If the small hit flag has not been set (N in step S116), that is, if the small hit has occurred, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol change processing, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the reserved number subtraction designation command (first reserved number subtraction designation command or second reserved number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted ( Step S1121). Note that whether or not the reserved storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted is determined, for example, by retaining the reserved storage number subtraction designation command when transmitting the reserved storage number subtraction designation command in step S1122 described below. The stored number subtraction designation command transmitted flag may be set, and in step S1121, it may be confirmed whether or not the reserved storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set. Also, in this case, the set reserved memory number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is reset by a special symbol stop process or a big hit end process, which will be described later, when ending the change display of the special symbol or ending the big hit. I just need.

  Next, if the reserved storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting the reserved storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved storage number subtraction designation command. When a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved storage number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 decrements the variable time timer by 1 (step S1125), and when the variable time timer times out (step S1126), performs control to transmit a symbol fixing designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56, if set, indicates a probable change flag indicating a probable change state, a time reduction flag indicating a time reduction state, and the number of times a special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state. Is reset (step S132), and control for transmitting the jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S133). Specifically, when the type of the big hit is “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”, a big hit start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. If the type of big hit is sudden change big hit, a small hit / sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. It should be noted that whether the type of the big hit is “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” is data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer). It is determined based on the

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying the occurrence of the big hit in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of “normal big hit” or “probable change big hit”, and 2 times in the case of “sudden positive change big hit”) is set in the special winning opening counter (step S135). . Also, a round time per round in the big hit game is set. Specifically, in the case of sudden change big hit, 0.1 second is set as the round time, and in the case of normal big hit and certain change big hit, 29 seconds is set as the round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S136).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time reduction counter by 1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S140).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / suddenly variable big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S142). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (a time in which the occurrence of the small hit is reported in the effect display device 9) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, two times) is set in the special winning opening number counter (step S144). In addition, the opening time per one big win in the small hit game is also set. Specifically, 0.1 seconds, which is the same as the round time of the sudden change big hit, is set as the opening time per big winning opening in the small hit game. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S146).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end processing, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a big hit end display timer is set (step S160). If the big hit end display timer is set, the CPU 56 shifts to step S164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a big hit end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, if it is "normal big hit" or "probable big hit", a big hit end designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted. An end designation command (command A302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to a display time corresponding to a time during which the big hit end display is being performed on the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process ends.

  In step S164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S164). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit to end this time is a normal big hit (step S166). In addition, it can be determined whether or not it is "normal big hit" by confirming whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "01". . If it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag and shifts to the time reduction state (step S167). In addition, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction counter (step S168).

  If it is not a normal jackpot (ie, if it is a probable big hit or a sudden big hit), the CPU 56 sets the probable change flag and shifts to the probable change state (step S169), and sets the time reduction flag to shift to the time reduction state. (Step S170).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S171).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a program for a special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol change processing is being executed), the CPU 56 converts the special symbol display control data for the special symbol change display into the special symbol display control data setting. A process for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates the special symbol display control data for performing the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 second, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one every 0.2 seconds. After that, a display control process (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting special symbol display control data. Variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, that is, if the process shifts to the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets a special symbol for stopping and displaying the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal process. A process of setting display control data in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. Then, after that, a display control process (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting special symbol display control data. Stop symbols of the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the main processing when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 4 ms) of the effect control is performed (step S701). . Then, effect control CPU 101 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt processing. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, first, effect control CPU 101 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process (step S705). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process process, a process corresponding to the current control state (fourth symbol process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and is selected in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9. The display control of the fourth symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number updating process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). After that, the procedure moves to step S702.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing one configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six effect control commands having a 2-byte configuration is used. Therefore, the command receiving buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of the receiving command buffers 1 to 12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. It is not always necessary to use the ring buffer format.

  FIGS. 33 to 35 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 checks the contents of the command stored in the command receiving buffer.

  In the command analysis process, first, effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a received command is stored in the command receiving buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where they match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for adding +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a fluctuation pattern command (step S614), effect control CPU 101 stores the received fluctuation pattern command in a fluctuation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command) in the RAM. The display result designation command storage area is stored (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol determination designation command (step S619), effect control CPU 101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is any of the symbol designating commands (step S621), the effect controlling CPU 101 stores the received symbol designating command in the first free prize-winning command storage area formed in the RAM. (Step S622).

  If the received effect control command is any of the variable category commands (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variable category command in each of the storage areas of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. It is stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designating command is stored (step S624).

  If the received production control command is the first reserved storage number addition designation command (step S625), the production control CPU 101 converts the received first reserved storage number addition designation command into the start winning prize command formed in the RAM. The latest symbol designating command and the variable category command are stored in the storage area of each storage area of the storage area (step S626). However, when the gaming state is in the probability changing state, the time saving state, the big hitting gaming state, or the small hitting gaming state, the symbol designation command and the fluctuation category command are not transmitted, and only the first reserved storage number addition designation command is transmitted. In some cases (see steps S1215A to S1219A), in this case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received first hold storage number addition designation command in the start winning prize command storage area formed in the RAM. Is stored in the first storage area.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 increases the hold display in the first hold storage display section 9a by one in a normal mode (white circle display in this example), and the first hold storage display section 9a. The storage number display is updated (step S627). Further, effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM (step S628).

  If the received production control command is the second reserved storage number addition designation command (step S629), the production control CPU 101 converts the received second reserved storage number addition designation command into the start winning command stored in the RAM. In the storage areas of the storage areas, the latest symbol designating command and the variable category command are stored in the storage area storing the command (step S630).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 increases the hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b by one in a normal mode (white circle display in this example), and then executes the second hold storage display unit 9b. The storage number display is updated (step S631). Further, effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM (step S632).

  If the received effect control command is the first hold storage number subtraction designation command (step S633), effect control CPU 101 erases one hold display in first hold storage display section 9a and changes the remaining hold display to 1. The first hold storage display in the first hold storage display section 9a is updated one by one (step S634). Further, effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is the second hold storage number subtraction designation command (step S636), the effect control CPU 101 deletes one hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b, and changes the remaining hold display to one. The display is shifted one by one, and the display of the number of second reserved storages in the second reserved storage display section 9b is updated (step S637). The effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM (step S638).

  If the received effect control command is the normal state background designation command (step S639), the effect control CPU 101 switches the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue display color). (Background screen) (step S640). If set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the time-saving state flag indicating that the gaming state is the time-saving state (step S641).

  If the received effect control command is a time-saving state background designation command (step S642), the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, a green display color). (Background screen) (step S643). Further, effect control CPU 101 sets a time reduction state flag (step S644). If set, the effect control CPU 101 resets a probability change state flag indicating that the game state is the probability change state (step S645).

  If the received effect control command is the probability change state background designation command (step S646), the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen (for example, a red display color) corresponding to the probability change state. (Background screen) (step S647). Further, effect control CPU 101 sets a probable change state flag (step S648).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol change designation command (step S649), effect control CPU 101 sets the first symbol change designation command reception flag (step S650). If the received effect control command is the second design change designation command (step S651), effect control CPU 101 sets the second design change designation command reception flag (step S652).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S653). For example, if the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command, a jackpot start designation command reception flag is set. If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command, a jackpot end designation command reception flag is set. Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an effect control process process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, first, effect control CPU 101 executes a reservation notice effect setting process for setting presence / absence of a reservation notice effect and a change pattern (step S800A).

  Next, effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and the variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, the control relating to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also performed in the second control. The control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process.

  Variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis processing is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801).

  Effect symbol variation start process (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change process (step S802).

  Processing during effect symbol fluctuation (step S802): The switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern is controlled, and the end of the fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the fluctuation of the effect symbol and to derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display processing (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit on the effect display device 9. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S805).

  Processing during round (step S805): Display control during round is performed. Then, if the round end condition is satisfied, and if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the last round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): The effect display device 9 performs display control for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the hold announcement effect setting process (step S800A). In the hold announcement effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 firstly executes a set of start winning commands (that is, a symbol designating command, a fluctuation category command, and a number-of-holding-storage-number specifying command (first holding-memory-number adding specifying command). Alternatively, it is confirmed whether a new set of the second reserved storage number addition specifying command) has been received (step S6001). Specifically, one set of a symbol designation command, a fluctuation category command, and a reserved storage number addition designation command (first reservation storage number addition designation command or second reserved storage number addition designation command) are stored in the start winning command storage area. It can be confirmed by judging whether or not it is newly stored. If one set of start winning commands has not been newly received, the process ends.

  If a set of start winning commands has been newly received, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the probable change state flag or the time reduction state flag is set (step S6002). If the probable change state flag or the time saving state flag is set (that is, if it is the probable change state or the time saving state), the process is terminated.

  If neither the probable change state flag nor the time reduction state flag is set (that is, in the normal state), the effect control CPU 101 sets the newly received hold storage number addition designation command (newly stored in the start winning time command storage area). (Step S6003). If the first reserved storage number addition designation command has not been newly received (that is, if the second reserved storage number addition designation command has been newly received), the processing is terminated as it is.

  By executing the processing of steps S6002 and S6003, in this embodiment, only when a start winning at the first starting winning opening 13 newly occurs while the gaming state is controlled to the normal state, The processing after step S6004 is executed, so that it is possible to execute a hold announcement effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, and for example, a hold announcement effect can be executed even when a start winning is generated in the second starting winning opening 14 while being controlled to a probable change state or a time saving state. May be configured.

  Further, for example, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable order in a winning order to the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, the gaming state is the normal state, A hold announcement effect can be executed regardless of whether it is in the probable change state or the time saving state, and regardless of which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 is a start winning. May be configured.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the first reserved storage number is 2 or more (step S6004). Whether or not the first reserved storage number is 2 or more can be determined, for example, by confirming the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635). . If the first reserved storage number is not 2 or more (that is, if the first reserved storage number is 1), the processing is terminated as it is.

  In this embodiment, when the hold announcement effect is performed, the display of the hold display is started in a normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display is changed to the special hold, the blue hold, and the red hold at the timing of the hold shift. However, the fact that the number of the first hold storage is only 1 at the time of the start winning prize means that, when the hold shift of the first hold memory is performed thereafter, the hold is immediately consumed and the variable display is performed. Therefore, there is no room to execute the hold notice effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined that if the first number of stored memories is not two or more in step S6004, it is determined that the hold announcement effect cannot be executed, and the process is terminated as it is.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment. For example, when the system is configured to display the blue hold or the red hold immediately at the timing of the start winning and start the execution of the hold announcement effect, the first hold storage is performed. Even if the number is 1, the process may proceed to the processing after step S6005 to execute the hold announcement effect.

  In addition, for example, in the case of a gaming machine configured to be able to display an active display corresponding to a variable display that is currently being executed by a display mode that has taken over a display mode of a hold display, the active display of the active display is performed after executing a hold notice effect. Since the display mode can be changed, even if the first hold storage number is 1, the process may proceed to the processing after step S6005 to execute the hold announcement effect.

  If the first hold storage number is 2 or more, effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode of the latest hold display based on the received latest fluctuation category command and the first hold storage number (step S6005). . In step S6005, the effect control CPU 101 selects a final display mode determination table for determining the latest display mode of the latest hold display based on the latest change category command and the first hold storage count. Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on the random number using the selected final display mode determination table, and determines the latest display mode of the latest suspended display.

  38 and 39 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in this embodiment, in the final display mode determination table, as the final display mode of the hold display, normal hold (without special hold), normal hold (with special hold), and blue Judgment values are assigned to the suspension and the red suspension, respectively. The “normal hold (with special hold via)” means that the game temporarily changes to the special hold at the timing of the hold shift after the start winning prize, and then finally shifts to the normal hold at the timing of the subsequent hold shift. Returning, the final display mode itself is normally on hold, but the on-hold announcement effect is executed. On the other hand, “normal hold (without special hold)” means that the normal hold does not change at all until the hold is exhausted and the hold display is cleared without changing to the special hold at all. It is equivalent to one that does not perform the production itself.

  If the first hold storage number is 2, there is only one opportunity to change the hold display at the timing of the hold shift after the start winning, so there is room for temporarily changing the hold display to the special hold. Absent. Therefore, the final display mode determination table for the first hold storage number “2” shown in FIGS. 38A to 38C includes only normal hold (no special hold via), blue hold, and red hold. Each of the judgment values is assigned, and there is no assignment of the judgment value for the normal hold (with special hold via).

  In addition, when the hold display is configured to be changeable a plurality of times during one change display or the active display is configured to be displayable, even if the first hold storage number is 2, The special hold may be displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category command is out of non-reach, super-reach is out or super-reach big hit, it is possible to execute a hold announcement effect. When the fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category command is another fluctuation category, the effect control CPU 101 changes the final display mode of the hold display to “normal hold (no special hold via)” as it is. The decision is made, and it is decided not to execute the hold notice effect.

  If the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “2”, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category command is non- In the case of the one indicating the out-of-reach (the fluctuation category 1 shown in FIG. 16), the final display mode determination table for the two reserved and non-reach out-of-reach shown in FIG. If the category indicates a super-reach loss (variation category 7 shown in FIG. 16), the two reserved and super-reach loss final display mode determination tables shown in FIG. 38B are selected, and the fluctuation category command is used. If the indicated fluctuation category indicates a super reach jackpot (the fluctuation categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 17), the fluctuation category shown in FIG. Hold two and selects a final display mode decision table super reach jackpot. In addition, if the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 101 executes the change category command. If the indicated fluctuation category indicates a non-reach loss (variation category 1 shown in FIG. 16), a final display mode determination table for 3 to 4 reservations and a non-reach loss shown in FIG. 39D is selected. If the fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category command indicates a super-reach loss (the fluctuation category 7 shown in FIG. 16), the final display mode for 3 to 4 reservations and the super-reach loss shown in FIG. A decision table is selected, and the fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category command indicates a super reach jackpot (the fluctuation categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 17). If, for selecting a final display mode decision table for pending 3-4 and super reach jackpot shown in FIG. 39 (F). Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on the random number using the selected final display mode determination table, and determines the latest display mode of the latest suspended display.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in this embodiment, when the super-reach is out of place or the super-reach is a big hit, as compared with the case in which the out-of-reach is out, the blue hold or the normal hold is finally finished. The rate of change to red hold is high. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the hold display finally changes to blue hold or red hold, the degree of expectation for super reach (reach reliability) is higher than in the case where normal hold is finally held. Is getting higher.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in this embodiment, in the case of a super-reach big hit, compared to the case of a non-reach out-of-reach or super-reach out-of-reach, finally, the blue color is more blue than the normal hold. The rate of change to hold or red hold is high. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in this embodiment, when the super-reach big hit occurs, compared with the case where the non-reach loss or the super-reach loss occurs, the red is finally more than the blue hold. The rate of change to pending is even higher. Therefore, in this embodiment, the expectation (big hit reliability) for the big hit is highest when the hold display of the notice object finally changes to the red hold, and when the hold display finally changes to the blue hold, the next big hit occurs. (Big hit reliability) is high, and the expectation (big hit reliability) for the big hit is lowest when the game is normally suspended.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, a case in which a hold announcement effect can be executed when the prize-winning determination result is non-reach loss, super-reach loss, or a super-reach big hit. Although shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when there is a fluctuation category that can be specified as a normal reach, a hold announcement effect may be configured to be executable based on a prize-time determination result of a normal reach loss or a normal reach big hit.

  When it is determined not to execute the hold announcement effect (N in step S6006), that is, when it is determined that the final display mode is normal hold (no special hold is passed), or the variable category indicates a super-reach loss or a super-reach big hit. If not, the process ends. If it is determined that the hold announcement effect is to be executed (Y in step S6006), the effect control CPU 101 displays the hold target of the announcement on the basis of the received latest fluctuation category command, the first number of stored memories, and the final display mode. Is determined (step S6007). In step S6007, the effect control CPU 101 selects a change pattern determination table for determining a change pattern of the suspended display to be notified based on the latest variable category command, the first number of retained memories, and the final display mode. Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on the random number using the selected change pattern determination table, and determines a change pattern of the pending display to be notified.

  40 and 41 are explanatory diagrams illustrating specific examples of the change pattern determination table. In FIG. 40 and FIG. 41, the special symbol “三角形” indicates a special hold in a triangle display, and the special symbol □ indicates a special hold in a rectangular display.

  If the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “2”, the effect control CPU 101 sets the final display mode determined in step S6005 to blue. If it is the hold, the two hold and the change pattern determination tables for the blue hold shown in FIG. 40A are selected, and if the final display mode determined in step S6005 is the red hold, it is shown in FIG. A change pattern determination table for two holdings and a red holding is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 40A, determination values are assigned to the two hold patterns and the change pattern determination table for blue hold so that the change pattern 21 is determined with a probability of 100%. Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (B), determination values are assigned to the change pattern determination table for two hold and red hold so that the change pattern 22 is determined with a probability of 100%. The change pattern 21 is a change pattern in which a hold display of a notice object is displayed as a normal hold at the time of start winning, and then the hold display of the notice object is changed to a blue hold at the timing of a hold shift. Further, the change pattern 22 is a change pattern in which the display of the suspension of the notice target is displayed in the normal suspension at the time of the start winning, and then the suspension display of the notice target is changed to the red reservation at the timing of the suspension shift. That is, the fact that the first hold storage number is “2” means that the hold shift timing is only one time, so that the final display mode of blue hold or red hold is held at the hold shift timing without going through special hold. To change.

  In addition, when the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “3”, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode determined in step S6005. Is normal hold (via special hold), the change pattern determination table for three holds and normal hold shown in FIG. 40C is selected, and if the final display mode determined in step S6005 is blue hold, 40 (D), and if the final display mode determined in step S6005 is red-hold, the three-hold and blue-hold change patterns shown in FIG. 40 (E) are selected. Select the change pattern determination table for red hold.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (C), in the three change patterns and the change pattern determination table for normal hold, determination values are assigned to the change patterns 31 and 32, respectively. The change pattern 31 is as follows. The hold display of the notice object is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, and then, at the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display of the notice object is changed to the special hold of the triangular display. This is a change pattern for changing the hold display of the notice target to the normal hold again at the timing. In addition, the change pattern 32 is such that when the start winning prize is displayed, the hold display of the notice object is displayed as the normal hold, then at the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display of the notice object is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is changed to the normal hold again at the timing of the shift.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (D), in the change pattern determination table for three holds and for the blue hold, determination values are assigned to the change patterns 33 and 34, respectively. The change pattern 33 is to display the hold display of the notice object in the normal hold at the time of the start winning, change the hold display of the notice object to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift, and change the hold display of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern for changing the hold display of the notice target to blue hold at the timing. Further, the change pattern 34 is such that the hold display of the notice object is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the notice object is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern that changes the suspension display of the notice target to blue suspension at the timing of the shift.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (E), in the change pattern determination table for three hold and red hold, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 35 and the change pattern 36, respectively. The change pattern 35 is as follows. At the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice object is displayed as the normal hold, and then at the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display of the notice object is changed to the special hold of the triangular display. This is a change pattern for changing the hold display of the notice target to red hold at the timing. Further, the change pattern 36 is such that the hold display of the notice object is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, then the hold display of the notice object is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern that changes the suspension display of the notice target to red suspension at the timing of the shift.

  Further, when the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “4”, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode determined in step S6005. Is normal hold (via special hold), the four hold and change pattern determination tables for normal hold shown in FIG. 41 (F) are selected. If the final display mode determined in step S6005 is blue hold, Then, the change pattern determination table shown in FIG. If the final display mode determined in step S6005 is red-hold, the variable category indicated by the variable category command indicates non-reach loss or super-reach loss (variable category 1 or variable category 7 shown in FIG. 16). ), The change pattern determination table for four reservations and non-reach out / superreach out and red reservation shown in FIG. 41H is selected, and the fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category command indicates a super-reach big hit. In this case (the fluctuation categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 17), the change pattern determination table shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (F), in the change pattern determination table for four hold patterns and the change pattern for normal hold, determination values are assigned to the change patterns 401, 402, 403, and 404, respectively. ing. The change pattern 401 is as follows: the hold display of the notice object is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, then the hold display of the notice object is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice object is changed to the normal hold again at the timing, and the hold display of the notice object is displayed as the normal hold at the timing of the third hold shift. In addition, the change pattern 402 is as follows: the hold display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice object is displayed as a special hold of a triangle display as it is at the timing of the shift, and the hold display of the notice object is changed to the normal hold again at the timing of the third hold shift. In addition, the change pattern 403 is such that the hold display of the notice object is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice object is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is changed to the normal hold again at the timing of the shift, and the hold display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold at the timing of the third hold shift. In addition, the change pattern 404 is as follows: the hold display of the notice object is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice object is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed as a special hold of a rectangular display as it is at the timing of the shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the normal hold again at the timing of the third hold shift.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (G), the change values for the change pattern 405, the change pattern 406, the change pattern 407, and the change pattern 408 are respectively set in the change pattern determination table for four holds and the blue hold. Allocated. The change pattern 405 is as follows: after the start winning prize, the hold display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold, and then at the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special hold of the triangle display, and the second hold shift is performed. This is a change pattern in which the suspension display of the advance notice is changed to blue suspension at the timing, and the suspension display of the advance notice is displayed in blue suspension at the timing of the third suspension shift. In addition, the change pattern 406 indicates that the hold display of the notice object is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, then the hold display of the notice object is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed as a special hold of a triangular display as it is at the timing of the shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to blue hold at the timing of the third hold shift. In addition, the change pattern 407 indicates that the hold display of the notice object is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, then the hold display of the notice object is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold This is a change pattern in which the suspension display of the advance notice is changed to blue suspension at the timing of the shift, and the suspension display of the advance notice is directly displayed in blue suspension at the timing of the third suspension shift. Further, the change pattern 408 indicates that the hold display of the notice object is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, then the hold display of the notice object is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice object is displayed as a special hold of a rectangular display as it is at the shift timing, and the hold display of the notice object is changed to blue hold at the timing of the third hold shift.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 (H) and (I), a change pattern determination table for four reservations and non-reach out-of-reach / super-reach out-of-reach and red retention, and four reservations and a super-reach big hit and red retention. In the change pattern determination table, determination values are assigned to the change patterns 409, 410, 411, 412, 413, and 414, respectively.

  In the change pattern 409, the hold display of the notice object is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice object is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is changed to red hold at the timing, and the hold display of the notice target is displayed in red hold as it is at the timing of the third hold shift. In addition, the change pattern 410 indicates that the hold display of the notice object is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, then the hold display of the notice object is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the reserved display of the advance notice is displayed as a special pending triangular display as it is at the timing of the shift, and the reserved display of the advance notice is changed to red pending at the timing of the third pending shift. Further, the change pattern 411 indicates that the hold display of the notice object is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, then the hold display of the notice object is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice object is displayed again as the normal hold at the timing of the shift, and the hold display of the notice object is changed to the red hold at the timing of the third hold shift. Further, the change pattern 412 indicates that the hold display of the notice object is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the notice object is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the suspension display of the advance notice is changed to red suspension at the timing of the shift, and the suspension display of the advance notice is displayed as it is in the red suspension at the timing of the third suspension shift. In addition, the change pattern 413 is such that when the start winning prize is displayed, the hold display of the notice object is displayed as the normal hold, and then the hold display of the notice object is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice object is displayed as a special hold of a rectangular display as it is at the timing of the shift, and the hold display of the notice object is changed to red hold at the timing of the third hold shift. In addition, the change pattern 414 indicates that the hold display of the notice object is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, then the hold display of the notice object is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice object is displayed again as the normal hold at the timing of the shift, and the hold display of the notice object is changed to the red hold at the timing of the third hold shift.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, when the first hold storage number is “4”, the hold display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, and the timing of the first hold shift , And can be changed to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold at the timing of the third or later hold shift. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the hold display of the advance notice is displayed at the fourth position (the state after the start winning) in the first hold storage display section 9a, it is displayed at the third position. In this case (the state after the first hold shift), the hold display of the notice target does not change from the special hold to the normal hold, the blue hold, or the red hold. Also, as shown in FIGS. 40 (C) to (E), in this embodiment, even when the first hold storage number is “3”, the hold display for the advance notice is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning. Therefore, when the hold display of the notice target is displayed at the third position on the first hold storage display unit 9a (the state after the start winning), the hold display of the notice target changes from the special hold to the normal hold. It does not change to blue hold or red hold. Therefore, in this embodiment, during the period in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed at the fourth and third positions, the hold display of the notice target is unlikely to change from the special hold to the normal hold. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by changing the hold display of the notice target from the special hold to the normal hold at an early stage, and to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when executing the hold notice effect. .

  In addition, without being limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, a special hold, a blue hold, and a red hold can be displayed immediately upon starting a prize, or without displaying the special hold and waiting for the next hold shift. By immediately executing the action effect described later and changing from special hold to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold, the hold display of the notice object is displayed at the fourth or third position. Even during this period, the hold display of the notice may be changed from the special hold to the normal hold, the blue hold, or the red hold. However, even in the case of such a configuration, at least during the period when the hold display of the notice target is displayed at the fourth or third position, the hold display of the notice target is changed from the special hold to the normal hold. It is preferable to configure so that the rate of change is low.

  Further, in this embodiment, the action effect described later can be executed at the timing of the hold shift after the special hold is displayed, and even if the action effect is executed, the hold display of the notice target does not change as the special hold. Or change to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold. For example, in the change patterns 401 and 403 shown in FIG. 41 (F), after the special hold is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift, the action effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift, and the special hold is started. Can be changed to normal hold. For example, in the change patterns 402 and 404 shown in FIG. 41 (F), although the special hold is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift, the action effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift. The action effect is executed at the timing of the third hold shift without changing the special hold, and the special hold can be changed to the normal hold. In this manner, in this embodiment, not only the case where one action effect returns from the special hold to the normal hold, but also a case where a plurality of effect effects are executed and the special hold returns to the normal hold, It is possible to improve the effect of effecting the execution of the pending notice effect.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 40 (C) to (E) and FIGS. 41 (F) to (I), in this embodiment, two types of special hold are available: a special hold in a triangle display and a special hold in a rectangular display. However, when the special hold of the rectangular display is displayed, the ratio of displaying the red hold as the final display mode is higher than when the special hold of the triangle display is displayed. . Conversely, when the special hold of the triangle display is displayed, the rate of returning to the normal hold as the final display mode is higher than when the special hold of the rectangular display is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 41H and 41I, in this embodiment, even if the special hold is returned to the normal hold, the red hold is finally displayed (that is, if the user returns to the normal hold, the discouragement is discouraged). A change pattern (change patterns 411, 414) is provided after the red hold is made to appear as if it were displayed again. Only when a super reach hit occurs, the change patterns 411, 414 of the resurrection pattern are displayed. Judgment values are assigned so that they can be determined. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the red-hold is finally returned after returning from the special-hold to the normal-hold once, the big hit will be determined, which is more than the case where the red-hold is simply changed from the special-hold. The expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is high.

  It should be noted that the change pattern 411, 414 of the resurrection pattern is not limited to the one in which the big hit is determined when the change pattern of the resurrection pattern is determined. You may. At least, even in the case of such a configuration, if the special hold temporarily returns to the normal hold and finally becomes the red hold, the big hit is more than the case where the special hold is simply changed to the red hold. It is sufficient that the degree of expectation (reliability) is high.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which the change patterns 411 and 414 of the resurrection pattern are provided only when the final display mode is red-holding. You may comprise so that the change pattern of a pattern may be provided.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 41 (H) and (I), the prize-winning determination result is a non-reach loss / super-reach loss or a super-reach big hit only when the status changes to four reservations and red reservation. Although the case where a different change pattern determination table is used according to the above is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a change pattern determination table for two holds or three holds shown in FIGS. 40 (A) to (E), or four hold and normal hold or blue hold shown in FIGS. 41 (F) and 41 (G). The change pattern determination table may be configured to use a different change pattern determination table in accordance with the winning determination result. In this case, for example, as described above, when the change pattern of the resurrection pattern is provided even when the final display mode is blue-hold, the non-reach loss / super is performed in a similar manner to FIGS. 41 (H) and (I). A change pattern determination table for the out-of-reach and a change pattern determination table for the super reach jackpot are provided. It may be configured such that it becomes certain or the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot increases.

  Further, by further subdividing, a change pattern determination table for non-reach out-of-reach and a change pattern determination table for super-reach out-of-reach may be provided separately.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41 (H), the change pattern determination table for four holds and red hold is a common table for non-reach loss and super-reach loss. Is used, but a different change pattern determination table may be used depending on the case of non-reach loss and the case of super-reach loss.

  The example of the change patterns shown in FIGS. 40 and 41 is merely an example, and various change patterns may be provided. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the case where the normal hold is changed from the normal hold to the special hold at the timing of the first hold shift, but the special hold is displayed from the timing of the start winning prize, and the second and subsequent times are displayed. A change pattern for changing from the normal hold to the special hold at the timing of the hold shift may be provided. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a change pattern in which the color is changed to the blue color and then changed to the red color is further provided.

  Further, FIGS. 40 and 41 show a case where only a change pattern in which either the special hold of the triangle display or the rectangular display is displayed is provided, but, for example, the change from the special hold of the triangle display to the special hold of the rectangular display is performed. Alternatively, a change pattern that changes from a special hold in a rectangular display to a special hold in a triangle display may be provided.

  Then, effect control CPU 101 stores the final display mode and the change pattern determined in steps S6005 and S6007 in the suspended notice effect setting information storage area provided in the RAM in association with the suspended storage of the notice object (step S6005). S6008). In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a hold announcement effect in parallel with a plurality of hold displays displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a, and the first hold storage display unit 9a has a maximum of Since four hold displays can be displayed, four hold areas are provided in the hold announcement effect setting information storage area, and a final display mode and a change pattern are stored in association with each hold memory. .

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag has been set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8000). Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8000 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). Symbol) is determined (step S8001). If a pseudo-run is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines in step S8001 that the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-run is a chance pattern (for example, “223” or “445”). , But a combination of a big hit symbol and a symbol which is not one of the reach but is shifted by one symbol) is also determined. The effect control CPU 101 stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 44, when the received display result designation command indicates “normal jackpot” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops. A combination of effect symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same even symbol as symbols is determined. Further, when the received display result specifying command indicates “probable change big hit” (when the received display result specifying command is the display result 3 specifying command), the effect control CPU 101 sets three symbols as stop symbols. The combination of effect symbols arranged with the same odd symbol is determined.

  Further, when the received display result specifying command indicates “suddenly changing large hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result specifying command is the display result 4 specifying command or the display result 5 specifying command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of "missing" (when the received display result specifying command is the display result 1 specifying command), combinations of effect symbols other than the above are determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols having two left and right symbols is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random symbol for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of the effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other, to determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical values corresponding to the extracted random numbers.

  In addition, also with respect to the effect symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left middle right is the same symbol) that recalls a big hit is referred to as a large hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds the player of a loss is referred to as a "off symbol". In addition, a symbol (an odd symbol in this embodiment) that reminds the user to enter the probability change state is also called a probability variation symbol, and a symbol (an even symbol in this embodiment) that reminds the user not to enter the probability variation state is a non-variable symbol. Also called.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the probable change state flag or the time saving state flag is set (step S8002). If neither the probable change state flag nor the time reduction state flag is set (that is, in the normal state), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the first symbol change designation command reception flag is set ( Step S8003). If the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (that is, if the variation display of the first special symbol is started), the flow shifts to step S8004. That is, in this embodiment, as described above, when the gaming state is the normal state, the holding notice effect is executed for the first holding memory, so that the processing of steps S8002 and S8003 is executed. By doing so, only when performing the fluctuating display of the first special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state, the processing of steps S8004 to S8010 is executed to change to the reserved display and the special reserved for the notice object, The effect production is configured to be executable.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not there is any special hold display timing in the first hold storage (step S8004). Whether or not there is a special hold display timing is determined, for example, by checking a change pattern stored in a hold announcement effect setting information storage area (see step S6008), and starting the current change (hold At the timing of (shift), it can be determined by confirming whether or not there is something that is normally held → special △ or special □. If there is a special hold display timing, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display at the special hold display timing to the special hold in the first hold storage display unit 9a (step S8005). . In this case, if the change pattern is changed from normal hold to special △, it is changed to a triangle display special hold, and if it is changed from normal hold to special □, it is changed to a rectangular display special hold.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 becomes the executable timing of the effect effect (the effect that is executed in a manner that acts on the hold display and suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes) in the first hold memory. It is checked whether or not there is any (Step S8006). Whether or not it is the execution timing of the action effect is checked, for example, by checking the change pattern stored in the hold notice effect setting information storage area (see step S6008), and determining whether or not the current change start (hold shift). Special △ → special △, special △ → normal hold, special △ → blue hold, special △ → red hold, special □ → special □, special □ → normal hold, special □ → blue hold, special □ → red hold at timing It can be determined by checking whether or not there is any of the following.

  The timing at which the action effect can be executed is not limited to the timing shown in this embodiment, and the action effect may be executed at another timing. For example, it may be configured such that even when changing from the normal hold to the special hold, it is determined that it is a timing at which the action effect can be executed, and the processes at and after step S8007 are executed to execute the action effect. In addition, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a special action effect is provided when changing from the normal hold to the special hold, and the special effect is not changed to the special hold even when the dedicated action effect is executed (action effect of gasket). It may be configured so that there is.

  If any of the first hold memories has a timing at which the action effect can be executed, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the effect effect is to be executed, and determines whether or not the effect effect is to be performed. A table according to the mode is selected (step S8007). Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on the random number using the selected action effect determination table, and determines the presence / absence and type of the action effect (step S8008).

  In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured so that the hold notice effect can be executed in parallel for the plurality of hold displays displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a, the action effect is stored in the first hold storage. There may be a case where there are a plurality of executable programs at the same time. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of the effect effect and the type of the effect effect by giving priority to the one in which the variable display is started first in the first hold memory at which the effect effect can be executed. In such a manner, the effect is controlled so as to be executed only once during one change display. For example, if the first and third hold displays displayed on the first hold storage display section 9a are the timings at which the action effect can be executed, first the action is performed on the first hold display. If the presence / absence and type of the effect are determined, and the effect effect is determined to be executed, the effect effect is executed only for the first hold display.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in the present embodiment, and may be configured such that a plurality of action effects can be executed during one variable display, for example, by executing an action effect while shifting the time. In addition, although the action effect is executed only once during one change display, the effect effect is executed in such a manner that the one action effect simultaneously operates on a plurality of hold displays. Is also good.

  FIGS. 45 and 46 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the action effect determination table. The effect control CPU 101 selects an action effect determination table for special 作用 → normal hold shown in FIG. 45 (A) at the timing of changing from the special hold of triangle display to the normal hold based on the change pattern. If it is the timing to change from the special hold of the rectangular display to the normal hold, the special effect-> normal hold action effect determination table shown in FIG. 45B is selected. If the timing does not change from the special hold of the triangle display to the special hold of the triangle display as it is, the action effect determination table for special {→ special} shown in FIG. 45C is selected. If the timing does not change from the special hold of the rectangular display to the special hold of the rectangular display as it is, the action effect determination table for special square → special square shown in FIG. 45D is selected. If the timing changes from the special display in the triangle display to the blue storage, the action effect determination table for special △ → blue storage shown in FIG. 46 (E) is selected. If it is the timing to change from the special hold of the rectangular display to the blue hold, the special effect → blue hold action effect determination table shown in FIG. 46 (F) is selected. If the timing changes from the special hold in the triangle display to the red hold, the action effect determination table for special 作用 → red hold shown in FIG. 46 (G) is selected. If the timing changes from the special hold of the rectangular display to the red hold, the action effect determination table for special □ → red hold shown in FIG. 46 (H) is selected.

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, in the action effect determination table, determination values are assigned to no effect effect, action effect A, effect effect B, and effect effect C, respectively. Note that, in this embodiment, there is shown a case where there are three types of action effects A to C as types of action effects. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. It may be configured or configured to use four or more types of action effects.

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, in this embodiment, when the action effect A is executed, the determination values are assigned so that the rate of change from special hold to normal hold increases. In addition, when the action effect B is executed, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio of the special pending and not changing becomes high. Further, when the action effect C is executed, the determination value is assigned so that the rate of change from special hold to blue hold or red hold becomes high.

  The action effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 45 (A) and (B) are tables used when the special hold is changed to the normal hold, and are patterns in which the display mode of the hold display is lowered to one having a low degree of expectation. In particular, since the selection ratio of the action effect A is high, the action effect A is an action effect of a pattern that lowers the display mode of the hold display to a low expectation. It can be said (pattern 1). The action effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 45 (C) and (D) are tables used when the special hold is not changed and remain unchanged, and are tables for selecting a pattern for maintaining the display mode of the hold display as it is. However, since the selection ratio of the action effect B is particularly high, it can be said that the action effect B is an effect effect of a pattern that maintains the display mode of the hold display as it is (pattern 2). Further, the action effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 46 (E) to 46 (H) are tables used when changing from special hold to blue hold or red hold, and the display mode of the hold display is changed to one having a high degree of expectation. It can be said that this is a table for selecting a pattern to be formed. In particular, since the selection ratio of the effect presentation C is high, the effect presentation C is an effect presentation of a pattern that raises the display mode of the hold display to a high expectation. (Pattern 3).

  Since the above-mentioned patterns 1 and 2 degrade the display mode of the hold display or maintain the current state, the effect is a pattern for making the change fail, and the pattern 3 is a display of the hold display. Since this is an embodiment, the effect is a pattern for making the change appear to be successful. In addition, even if the pattern is to show the same change failure, the way of showing the action effect may be different between the above-mentioned pattern 1 and pattern 2. For example, a character display such as "great failure" is displayed when the action effect according to the above pattern 1 is executed, and a character such as "failure" is displayed when the action effect according to the above pattern 2 is executed. The display may be made different.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the presence / absence of the action effect and the determination ratio of the type are changed depending on which display mode the hold display changes in the current variable display. , But is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the presence / absence of the action effect and the determination ratio of the type may be made different depending on which final display mode the hold display changes, regardless of the current change mode of the variable display.

  In addition, for example, the determination ratio of the presence or absence of the action effect and the determination ratio of the type may be varied according to the display result (for example, whether or not a big hit occurs) of the variation display of the notice target and the variation category (for example, the presence or absence of the reach and the type). May be configured.

  Further, for example, in a case where the display mode of the hold display is changed from blue hold to red hold in some cases, an action effect can be performed even when the change display does not change while keeping the blue hold. May be.

  Also, as described above, when the display mode of the hold display is configured to change from blue hold to red hold in some cases, even if the same special hold changes to blue hold in the current variable display, The execution ratio and type of the action effect may be changed depending on whether the final display mode is blue or red. For example, an arrangement may be made in which the action effect is executed at a higher rate when the final display mode is red-hold, or an effect effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, an effect effect C) is executed. Or, conversely, it may be configured such that the action effect is executed at a higher rate when the final display mode is blue-hold, or an effect effect having a high degree of expectation (for example, an effect effect C) is executed. . With such a configuration, it is possible not only to give a sense of expectation whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes in the variable display executed this time, but also to determine whether the display mode of the hold display may change thereafter. Expectations can be given to them.

  When it is determined to execute the action effect (Y in step S8009), the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the type of the effect effect determined in step S8008 (step S8010). . Then, control goes to a step S8012.

  On the other hand, if the probable change state flag or the time saving state flag has been set (Y in step S8002), if the first symbol change designation command reception flag has not been set (N in step S8003), the first hold storage If there is no action effect executable timing (N in step S8006), or if it is determined not to execute the effect effect (N in step S8009), the effect control CPU 101 A normal process table (a process table without effect presentation) corresponding to the pattern is selected (step S8011). Then, control goes to a step S8012.

  Then, effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer in process data 1 of the process table selected in steps S8010 and S8011 (step S8012).

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is configured by data in which a plurality of combinations of a process timer set value, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variable time) of the variable display of the effect symbol are described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. In the process timer set value, a variation time in the variation mode is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control for displaying the effect symbols in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 47 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Further, a process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

  In the process table used when performing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. Instead of setting the symbol to be stop-displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-run or the temporary stop symbol in the slide effect. You may.

  In addition, during the display of the change of the effect symbol, a notice effect (so-called notice effect for the change) other than the pre-read notice effect (in this example, the hold notice effect) may be configured to be executable. If it is determined that the effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the determined announcement effect in steps S8010 and S8011.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 generates the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, and the effect component as the effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S8013). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 70 in order to output audio from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control such that the effect pattern is variably displayed according to the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. May be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8014).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a command for a start winning (a symbol designation command, a fluctuation category command, and a command for adding the number of reserved storages (first addition of the number of reserved storages) stored in the storage area of the command storage area for starting winning. One of the commands at the time of the start prize winning stored in the first storage area is deleted and the content of the command storage area at the time of the start prize winning is shifted (the designated command or the second reserved storage number addition specifying command)) ( Step S8015).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8016).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol change process (step S802) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol fluctuation process, the effect control CPU 101 first decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S8101) and decrements the value of the fluctuation time timer by 1 (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). In addition, the control state of the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S8105).

  Next, effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the action effect is being executed and the end of the effect effect has come (step S8106). In addition, whether or not the end timing of the action effect can be determined by confirming the value of the variable time timer set in step S8014. If the end timing of the action effect has come, the effect control CPU 101 sets the suspension display of the announcement target to blue suspension or blue suspension based on the change pattern stored in the suspension announcement effect setting information storage area (see step S6008). It is confirmed whether or not it is time to change to red hold (step S8107). If it is the change timing to the blue hold or the red hold, the effect control CPU 101 controls the first hold storage display unit 9a to change the display mode of the hold target of the notice to the blue hold or the red hold. Performed (step S8108).

  If the timing for changing to the blue hold or the red hold has not come, the effect control CPU 101 displays the hold of the notice target based on the change pattern stored in the hold notice effect setting information storage area (see step S6008). It is confirmed whether or not is the timing for changing to the normal suspension (step S8109). If it is time to change to the normal hold, the effect control CPU 101 controls the first hold storage display unit 9a to change the display mode of the hold display of the notice target to the normal hold (step S8110).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the information in the other hold memory based on the change pattern stored in the hold notice effect setting information storage area (see step S6008) even if the end time of the action effect has not come. It is confirmed whether or not there is a change timing to the blue hold or the red hold (step S8111). Then, if there is a change timing to the blue hold or the red hold (Y in step S8111), the effect control CPU 101 causes the first hold storage display unit 9a to display the hold display of the notice target in the first hold storage display unit 9a. Is changed to blue hold or red hold (step S8112). That is, in this embodiment, there is a case where it is determined that the action effect is not to be executed even in the case of the variable display that is the timing of changing from the special hold to the blue hold or the red hold (see steps S8008 and S8009). ), Even when the action effect is not executed, control is performed to change the hold display, which is the timing of changing from the special hold to the blue hold or the red hold, to the blue hold or the red hold.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the information in the other hold memory based on the change pattern stored in the hold notice effect setting information storage area (see step S6008) even if the end time of the action effect has not come. It is confirmed whether or not there is a change timing to the normal suspension (step S8113). Then, if there is a change timing to the normal hold (Y in step S8113), the effect control CPU 101 changes the display mode of the hold display of the notice target to the normal hold in the first hold storage display unit 9a. Is performed (step S8114). That is, in this embodiment, even in the case of the variable display at the timing of changing from the special hold to the normal hold, it may be determined that the action effect is not executed (see steps S8008 and S8009). Even when the effect is not executed, control is performed to change the hold display at the timing of changing from the special hold to the normal hold to the normal hold.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S8115), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S8116).

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the effect design change stop process (step S803) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag has been set, the flow shifts to step S8305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, when executing the fanfare effect, the stop symbol display flag is reset. Therefore, when the stop symbol display flag is set, it means that the big hit symbol has been stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not been executed yet. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. The process moves to step S8305 without any processing.

  If the stop symbol display flag has not been set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol, big hit symbol) (step S8302).

  Next, when neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when a lost symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 shifts to step S8311. I do.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S8304).

  Next, effect control CPU 101 confirms whether any of the jackpot start designation commands has been received (step S8305). Whether or not any of the jackpot start designation commands has been received is specifically determined by a flag (a jackpot start designation command reception flag) indicating that a jackpot start designation command set in the command analysis process has been received, The determination can be made by confirming whether or not a flag (small hit / sudden sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag) indicating that the small hit / suddenly changing big hit start designation command has been received is set. If any jackpot start designation command has been received, effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and selects a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S8307). The effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag if the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly variable big hit start designation command reception flag is set.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number, sound number) In accordance with the data 1 and the movable member control data 1), the control of the rendering device (the rendering display device 9 as the rendering component, the various lamps as the rendering component, and the speaker 27 as the rendering component) is executed (step S8309). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag in accordance with the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). The value is updated to a value (step S8311).

  Next, a description will be given of a specific example of an effect mode of the hold notice effect. FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of an effect mode of the hold notice effect. Among them, FIG. 50 shows an effect mode of the hold announcement effect when the suspension display of the notice object finally changes to the red hold. FIG. 51 shows an effect mode of the hold announcement effect when the suspension display of the announcement target finally returns to the normal hold. In addition, in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

  First, with reference to FIG. 50, a description will be given of an effect mode of the hold announcement effect when the suspension display of the notice object finally changes to red suspension. As shown in FIG. 50 (1), it is assumed that a new start prize in the first start winning opening 13 is newly generated when the effect display device 9 is performing the variable display of the middle left and right effect symbols. In this example, it is assumed that a new start prize is generated in a state where the first hold storage number is 3, the first hold storage number is increased to 4, and the normal hold is increased by 1 in the first hold storage display section 9a. Let it be. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new hold display is determined to be red hold and the change pattern 410 is determined as the change pattern. Then, based on the fact that the variable display time has ended, as shown in FIG. 50 (2), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol.

  Next, the hold memory is consumed one by one and the hold displays are shifted one by one, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (3), when the variable display is started, the suspension display of the notice object is changed from the normal suspension to the special suspension of the triangle display based on the change pattern 410 (see step S8005). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the effect symbol is ended in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG.

  Next, the hold memory is consumed one by one, and the hold displays are shifted one by one, and the next variation display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 50 (5). In the example shown in FIG. 50 (5), when the variation display is started, it is determined that it is time to execute the action effect based on the change pattern 410, and it is determined that the action effect is to be executed. It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 50 (5), the action effect B is executed in the variation display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). The example shown in FIG. 50 (5) shows a case where a character B appears as the action effect B, and the character B throws a ball toward special holding. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 50 (5), a case is shown in which the variation display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the action effect. Next, in this example, as shown in FIG. 50 (6), even if the end timing of the action effect B is reached, the suspension display of the notice target based on the change pattern 410 does not change with the special suspension. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol, as shown in FIG.

  Next, the hold memory is consumed one by one, and the hold display is shifted one by one, and the next variation display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (8), when the variation display is started, it is determined that it is time to execute the action effect based on the change pattern 410, and it is determined that the action effect is to be executed. It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect C (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 50 (8), the action effect C is executed in the variation display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). The example shown in FIG. 50 (8) shows a case where a character C appears as the action effect C and an effect is performed in such a manner that the character C throws a ball toward a special hold. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 50 (8), a case is shown in which the effect design fluctuation display is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the effect effect. Next, in this example, as shown in FIG. 50 (9), at the end timing of the action effect C, the hold display of the advance notice changes from special hold to red hold based on the change pattern 410 (steps S8107, S8108). reference).

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, a case is shown in which a special hold in a triangle display is displayed as the special hold. In 3) to (8), a special hold of a rectangular display is displayed. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 50, a case where red hold is displayed as the final display mode is shown. However, when a change pattern that displays blue hold as the final display mode is determined, FIG. At 9), the status is changed from special hold to blue hold.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a description will be given of an effect mode of a hold announcement effect in a case where the suspension display of the notice object finally returns to the normal suspension. As shown in FIG. 51 (1), it is assumed that a new start prize in the first start prize port 13 has been generated while the effect display device 9 is performing the variable display of the middle left and right effect symbols. In this example, it is assumed that a new start prize is generated in a state where the first hold storage number is 3, the first hold storage number is increased to 4, and the normal hold is increased by 1 in the first hold storage display section 9a. Let it be. In this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new hold display is determined to be normal hold (with special hold via), and that the change pattern 402 is determined as the change pattern. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the effect symbol is ended in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG.

  Next, the reservation memory is consumed one by one, and the suspension display is shifted one by one, and the next variable display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 51 (3), when the variable display is started, the suspension display of the notice object is changed from the normal suspension to the special suspension of the triangle display based on the change pattern 402 (see step S8005). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 51 (4), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol.

  Next, the reservation memory is digested one by one and the suspension display is shifted one by one, and the next variable display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 51 (5). In the example shown in FIG. 51 (5), when the variable display is started, it is determined that it is the action production executable timing based on the change pattern 402, and it is determined that the action production is to be executed. It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 51 (5), the action effect B is executed in the variation display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). The example shown in FIG. 51 (5) shows a case where a character B appears as an action effect B, and an effect is performed in such a manner that the character B throws a ball toward a special hold. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 51 (5), a case is shown in which the effect design variation display is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the effect effect. Next, in this example, as shown in FIG. 51 (6), even if the end timing of the action effect B is reached, the suspension display of the notice target based on the change pattern 402 does not change with the special suspension. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 51 (7), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol.

  Next, the hold memory is consumed one by one, and the hold displays are shifted one by one, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 51 (8). In the example shown in FIG. 51 (8), when the variation display is started, it is determined that it is the action production executable timing based on the change pattern 402, and it is determined that the action production is to be executed. It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect A (see step S8008). Also, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 51 (8), the action effect A is executed in the variation display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). The example shown in FIG. 51 (8) shows a case where a character A appears as the action effect A, and an effect in which the character A throws a ball toward a special hold is executed. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 51 (8), a case is shown in which the variation display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the effect effect. Next, in this example, as shown in FIG. 51 (9), when the end timing of the action effect A comes, the suspension display of the notice target changes from the special suspension to the normal suspension based on the change pattern 402 (steps S8109, S8110). reference).

  Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 51, a case is shown in which a special hold in the form of a triangle is displayed as the special hold. In 3) to (8), a special hold of a rectangular display is displayed.

  In the hold announcement effects shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the manner in which the action effects are presented may be changed depending on which display mode the hold display changes (or does not change). For example, if the hold display does not change with special hold and does not change, display a character such as "failure", if the hold display falls from special hold to normal hold, display a character such as "great failure", When the hold display changes from the special hold to the blue hold or the red hold, a character display such as “success” may be displayed.

  Also, for example, when the display mode of the hold display is configured to change from the blue hold to the red hold in some cases, when the hold display changes from the blue hold to the red hold, a character display such as `` success '' is displayed. When the hold display immediately changes from the special hold to the red hold, a character display such as "great success" may be displayed.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a specific display (in this example, hold display) corresponding to a variable display, and to perform specific display in the first mode (in this example, special hold). Is displayed, a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display (in this example, a pending announcement effect accompanied by an operation effect) can be executed. Further, as a change effect, after displaying the specific display in the first mode, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to a second mode having a high degree of advantage (in this example, blue hold or red hold) can be executed. In addition, as a change effect, when the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after the specific display is displayed in the first mode, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the third mode (in this example, the normal mode is usually used). (Pending) can be performed. Then, the specific display displayed in the third mode has a lower rate of change to the second mode than the specific display displayed in the first mode (in this example, as shown in FIGS. Is changed to normal hold and then to red hold, there are only change patterns 411 and 414 that can be selected only when the first hold storage number is 4 and a super reach big hit occurs at the time of the start winning, and there is only a change pattern of the determination value. Allocation is extremely small, and the change pattern 31, 32, 401 to 404, which does not change as it is in the normal hold state, has a larger allocation of the determination value. May be used.) For this reason, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when performing the change effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the specific display displayed in the third mode has a lower degree of advantage than the specific display displayed in the first mode (in this example, as shown in FIG. From normal hold to normal hold (in the case of normal hold (with special hold)), the ratio of super reach big hits and super reach misses is lower than that of blue hold or red hold, and non-reach misses Is high). For this reason, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when performing the change effect.

  Specifically, if the first mode (in this example, special hold) is continuously displayed even if the action effect of the failure mode is executed in the hold notice effect, the first mode (in this example, Although there is a possibility that the sense of expectation for the special hold may decrease, in this embodiment, the state changes from the first mode (in this example, special hold) to the third mode (in this example, normal hold). It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the aspect, and to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when executing the change effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, the hold display changed from the special hold to the normal hold is shown as the “specific display displayed in the third mode”, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the "specific display displayed by the third mode" is configured to include the one that is displayed in the normal hold from the beginning without going through the special hold. In comparison, the rate of change to blue hold or red hold may be reduced, or the advantage may be reduced.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when the same normal hold is performed, when the special hold is changed to the normal hold, the expectation is lower than when the normal hold is displayed from the beginning, and the advantage is lower. It is lower.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot expectation and the reach (super-reach) expectation are different as the “advantage” has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and the probability variation expectation is different. Is also good.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the display mode of the specific display includes at least the first mode (in this example, special hold; normal hold may be used) and the second mode (in this example, which is highly advantageous). , Blue hold, red hold). As a change effect, after displaying the specific display in the first mode, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode can be executed, and the change effect is performed in accordance with the execution mode of the executed change operation. (In this example, if an effect effect is executed in the hold announcement effect but the special effect remains unchanged, the effect effect is executed again and the special effect is executed) Can be changed to blue hold or red hold, but if the action effect is executed in the hold announcement effect and the special hold is changed to blue hold or red hold, then the effect effect is not executed). Therefore, attention can be paid to the change effect that is executed first, and the interest in the case where the change effect is executed can be improved.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the action effect is executed in the hold announcement effect and the special effect changes from the special hold to the blue hold or the red hold, a case is shown in which the effect effect is not executed thereafter. However, the effect production may be configured to be executable at a low rate. As described above, “the execution of the change effect at a different rate after the change effect according to the execution mode of the executed change effect” includes the following actions when the special hold is changed to the blue hold or the red hold. Also includes those with a low execution rate of the effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as a change effect, after displaying the specific display in the first mode, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode can be executed. After the change effect, a change effect can be executed in a different effect mode after the change effect (in this example, if the action effect is executed in the hold notice effect and the change effect remains in the special hold, After that, the action effect is executed again and it is possible to change from special hold to blue hold or red hold, but if the action effect is executed in the hold announcement effect and changes from special hold to blue hold or red hold, then If the action effect is executed in the hold announcement effect and the special effect remains unchanged, then the effect effect is executed again and the special effect is changed from the special hold to the blue color effect. There is the case that change to red hold and if changes, many variations of the representation embodiment.). Therefore, attention can be paid to the change effect that is executed first, and the interest in the case where the change effect is executed can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as a change effect, after displaying the specific display in the first mode, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode can be executed. Depending on the execution mode, the ratio of whether to execute the change effect for any particular display after the change effect is different (in this example, when a plurality of special holds are displayed, the action in the hold announcement effect is performed). If the effect is executed and the first special hold changes to blue hold or red hold, then the action effect is executed only for the second or later special hold and the hold display changes However, if the first special hold does not change, then the action effect is also performed on the first special hold and the hold display can be changed). Therefore, attention can be paid to the change effect that is executed first, and the interest in the case where the change effect is executed can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as a change effect, after displaying the specific display in the first mode, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode can be executed. An effect can be executed (in this example, the effect effects A to C can be executed in the pending announcement effect), and any type of change effect is performed after the change effect according to the execution mode of the executed change effect. (In this example, when the action effect B is executed, the rate of not changing the special effect remains high, and when the action effect is executed after the special effect does not change while the special effect is held, Often changes to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold, so that the ratio of the action effect A and the action effect C increases). Therefore, attention can be paid to the change effect that is executed first, and the interest in the case where the change effect is executed can be improved.

  Note that, in the case where the action effect is configured to be executable even after the change from the special hold to the normal hold, “any type of change effect is executed after the change effect according to the execution mode of the executed change effect. The term “difference in the effect ratio” may include, for example, an effect effect that does not change the display mode of the hold display in the effect effect that is executed later (the effect effect of the gasket).

  Further, according to this embodiment, as a change effect, after the specific display is displayed in the first mode (in this example, special hold), the display mode of the specific display is changed to the second mode (this example) In this case, it is possible to execute an effect of changing to the blue hold or the red hold), and, as a change effect, displaying the specific display in the first mode, and then not changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode. An effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (in this example, normally reserved) can be executed. Then, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the third mode at a different ratio in accordance with the execution mode of the change effect (in this example, as shown in FIG. The rate of change from special hold to normal hold is high). For this reason, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when performing the change effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of the first mode (in this example, special hold of triangle display and special hold of rectangular display), and as a change effect, the first mode (in this example, special hold). After the specific display is displayed, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode (in this example, blue hold or red hold) having a high degree of advantage, and to perform the first change as the change effect. When the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after the specific display is displayed according to the mode, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (in this example, normally reserved) can be executed. It is. Then, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the third mode at a different rate according to which type of the first mode the specific display is displayed (in this example, as shown in FIG. When the special hold in the triangle display is displayed, the rate of change from the special hold to the normal hold is higher than when the special hold in the rectangular display is displayed). For this reason, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when performing the change effect.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case where there are two types of special reservations (triangle display and rectangular display) having different shapes as a plurality of types of first modes has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. May be configured so that there are a plurality of types of hold displays (for example, blue and green hold displays) different from each other. Further, for example, the present invention is not limited to two types of first modes (normal hold or special hold), and may be configured to include three or more first modes (normal hold or special hold).

  Further, according to this embodiment, as a change effect, after the specific display is displayed in the first mode (in this example, special hold), the display mode of the specific display is changed to the second mode (this example) In this case, it is possible to execute an effect of changing to the blue hold or the red hold), and, as a change effect, displaying the specific display in the first mode, and then not changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode. An effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (in this example, normally reserved) can be executed. Then, in the predetermined period, the rate of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode is low (in this example, in the period in which the suspended display of the notice target is displayed at the fourth and third positions, It is difficult for the hold indication of the notice object to change from the special hold to the normal hold, and the hold indication of the notice object may not change from the special hold to the normal hold at all.) For this reason, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when performing the change effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the specific display is displayed in a special mode (in this example, special hold) different from the normal mode as the first mode. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when performing the change effect.

  In this embodiment, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is the highest when the red is held, and the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is the next highest when the blue is held. The expectation (reliability) for the big hit may be the same between the special hold and the special hold, or the expectation (reliability) for the big hit may be higher in the special hold than in the normal hold.

  In this embodiment, the special hold is displayed as the first mode, the normal hold is displayed as the third mode, and the case where the special hold is changed to the normal hold is described. However, the present embodiment is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, the normal hold is displayed in the position of the first mode, and as the third mode, the hold mode indicating that the display mode of the hold display has been changed (for example, a round display including the character display of “OK”) May be displayed. Hereinafter, a modified example 1 in which the completed suspension can be displayed will be described.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect mode of the hold notice effect in the first modification. In the first modification, the processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) is performed according to each of FIGS. 37 to 41, FIG. 43, FIGS. 45 to 46, and FIG. This is equivalent to reading the special hold into the normal hold in the process and each determination table, and reading the normal hold after changing from the special hold into the finished hold.

  In the modification 1 shown in FIG. 52 as well, the allocation to the change pattern in which the special patterns in which the change patterns 411 and 414 shown in FIG. The rate of change to hold is lower than the rate of change from normal hold to red hold, and finished hold has a lower advantage than normal hold.

  In the first modification, as shown in FIG. 52A, when the effect display device 9 is performing the variable display of the left-middle-right effect symbol, a new start winning in the first start winning port 13 occurs. Shall be done. In the example shown in FIG. 52, it is assumed that a new start winning is generated in a state where the first hold storage number is 3, the first hold storage number is increased to 4, and the normal hold is displayed in the first hold storage display section 9a. It is assumed that it has been increased by one. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new hold display is determined to be “final hold”, and the change pattern 402 (however, a change pattern read as “final hold” or the like) is determined as the change pattern. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the effect symbol is ended in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG.

  Next, the hold memory is consumed one by one and the hold display is shifted one by one, and the next variable display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 52 (3). However, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (3), when the variable display is started, based on the change pattern 402, the suspension display of the notice target does not change while being normally suspended. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the effect symbol is ended in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 52 (4).

  Next, the hold memory is consumed one by one, and the hold displays are shifted one by one, and the next variation display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 52 (5). In the example shown in FIG. 52 (5), when the variable display is started, it is determined that it is time to execute the action effect based on the change pattern 402, and it is determined that the action effect is to be executed. It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 52 (5), the action effect B is executed in the variation display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). In the example illustrated in FIG. 52 (5), when a character B appears as the action effect B, and the character B throws a ball toward a hold display (normal hold) to be notified, and the effect is performed. Is shown. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (5), a case is shown in which the variation display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the effect effect. Next, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 52 (6), even when the end timing of the action effect B is reached, the suspension display of the notice target based on the change pattern 402 does not change with the normal suspension. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the effect symbol is ended in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG.

  Next, the hold memory is consumed one by one, and the hold displays are shifted one by one, and the next variation display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 52 (8). In the example shown in FIG. 52 (8), when the variation display is started, it is determined that it is time to execute the action effect based on the change pattern 402, and it is determined that the action effect is to be executed. It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect A (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 52 (8), the action effect A is executed in the variation display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). In the example illustrated in FIG. 52 (8), a case is described in which a character A appears as the action effect A, and the character A throws a ball toward a hold display (normal hold) to be announced. Is shown. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (8), a case is shown in which the variation display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the effect effect. Next, in this example, as shown in FIG. 52 (9), at the end timing of the action effect A, the hold display of the notice target changes from the normal hold to the finished hold based on the change pattern 402 (steps S8109, S8110). reference).

According to the first modification shown in FIG. 52, the specific display is displayed in the normal mode (normal hold) as the first mode. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when performing the change effect.

  Note that, in this embodiment, the expression “normal mode (normal hold)” is used. The normal mode (normal hold) is, for example, a display mode of a hold display that is displayed when a hold announcement effect is executed. Is the display mode with the highest frequency of display, and does not indicate the possibility of a jackpot or reach, or indicates that the possibility is relatively low.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the hold announcement effect is executed so that only the hold display can be changed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in a gaming machine configured to be able to display an active display corresponding to a variation display currently being executed by a display mode taking over a display configuration of a hold display, the variation display of a preview target is being executed while the hold display is exhausted. Even if it becomes, the display mode of the active display may be configured to be changeable. That is, the present invention is not limited to the case where the hold display is changeable as the specific display, and the active display may also be changeable as the specific display. Hereinafter, Modification 2 in which the display mode of the active display can be changed will be described.

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect mode of the hold notice effect in the second modification. In the second modification, the processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) is performed according to the processes shown in FIGS. 37 to 41, FIG. 43, FIGS. 45 to 46, and FIG. In the processing and each decision table, processing to display the active display is added, and the same display as the normal hold, special hold, blue hold, and red hold can be displayed in the active display, and the display mode of the active display is changed. The change pattern may be configured as much as possible.

  In Modification 2, as shown in FIG. 53 (1), when the effect display device 9 is performing the variation display of the left-middle-right effect symbol, a new start winning in the first start winning port 13 occurs. Shall be done. In this example, it is assumed that a new start winning is generated in a state where the first hold storage number is 2, the first hold storage number is increased to 3, and the normal hold is increased by 1 in the first hold storage display section 9a. Let it be. Also, it is assumed that an active display section 9F is provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and an active display corresponding to the currently executed variable display is displayed on the active display section 9F. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new hold display is determined to be normal hold (with special hold via), and the change pattern 402 (however, the change pattern in which the active display is read as changeable) is used as the change pattern. It shall be decided. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 53 (2), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol.

  Next, the hold memory is consumed one by one, and the hold displays are shifted one by one, and the next variable display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 53 (3). In the example shown in FIG. 53 (3), when the variable display is started, based on the change pattern 402, the hold display of the notice is changed from the normal hold to the special hold of the triangle display (see step S8005). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 53 (4), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbol.

  Next, the hold memory is consumed one by one, and the hold displays are shifted one by one, and the next variable display is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 53 (5). In the example shown in FIG. 53 (5), when the variation display is started, it is determined that it is the action production executable timing based on the change pattern 402, and it is determined that the action production is to be executed. It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 53 (5), the action effect B is executed in the variation display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). The example illustrated in FIG. 53 (5) illustrates a case where a character B appears as the action effect B, and an effect is performed in such a manner that the character B throws a ball toward a special hold. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53 (5), a case is shown in which the variation display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the effect effect. Next, in this example, as shown in FIG. 53 (6), even if the end timing of the action effect B is reached, the suspension display of the notice target based on the change pattern 402 does not change with the special suspension. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the effect symbol is ended in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 53 (7).

  Next, one of the hold memories is consumed, and the next variation display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. In addition, based on the start of the variable display of the notice object, as shown in FIG. 53 (8), the active display of the display mode similar to the special hold is performed in response to the variable display of the notice object currently being executed. It is displayed on the active display section 9F. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53 (8), when the variation display is started, it is determined that the action effect is executable based on the change pattern 402, and it is determined that the action effect is to be executed. It is assumed that the type of effect is determined to be the effect effect A (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 53 (8), the action effect A is executed in the variation display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 53 (8), as the action effect A, a character A appears and the character A throws a ball toward the active display in the same display mode as the special hold. Shows the case. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53 (8), a case is shown in which the variation display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the effect effect. Next, in this example, as shown in FIG. 53 (9), at the end timing of the action effect A, based on the change pattern 402, the active display of the display mode similar to the special hold is changed to the display mode similar to the normal hold. The display changes to the active display (see steps S8109 and S8110).

  When the display of blue or blue is determined as the final display mode, the active display may be changed to the active display of the same display mode as the blue or red hold in FIG. 53 (9).

  Further, according to this embodiment, the action effect (in this example, FIG. 50 (5) or FIG. 50 (8), FIG. 51 (5 ), A change effect including the effect effect of the mode shown in FIG. 51 (8) can be executed. Further, the action effect can be executed a plurality of times for the specific display displayed in the first mode (in the present example, in the change patterns 402 and 404 shown in FIG. 41F, the first hold shift). After the special hold is displayed at the timing of, the action effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift, but does not change as the special hold, and the action effect is executed at the timing of the third hold shift and the special hold is performed. To normal hold). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of performing the change effect.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a change pattern capable of performing the action effect at most twice is provided, but a change pattern capable of executing the action effect three or more times is provided. Is also good.

  According to this embodiment, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the third mode changes to the second mode, the display mode of the specific display displayed in the first mode changes to the second mode. The degree of advantage is higher than that in the case of changing (in this example, as shown in FIG. 41, a change pattern (change patterns 411 and 414) in which a red hold is finally displayed even after returning from special hold to normal hold is provided. The change patterns 411 and 414 can be determined only when a super-reach big hit occurs.) Therefore, the sense of expectation for the specific display displayed in the third mode can be increased.

  In this embodiment, as a case where the display mode of the specific display displayed in the third mode changes to the second mode, a case where the hold mode changed from the special mode to the normal mode further changes to the red mode. However, the present invention is not limited to such a content, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage is increased even when a hold display initially displayed as a normal hold changes to a red hold.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the final display mode and the change pattern of the hold display are determined at the time of the start winning, and then the presence or absence and type of the action effect are determined for each variable display. It is not limited. For example, without using a change pattern, it is configured to determine the presence / absence and type of action effect for each variable display, and to determine whether to change from special hold to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold. You may.

Embodiment 2 FIG.
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, when the special hold changes from the normal hold to the normal hold, the other hold displays change from the special hold to the normal hold until the hold display changed to the normal hold is consumed. You may be comprised so that a thing may be restricted. Hereinafter, a second embodiment for restricting a change from special hold to normal hold will be described.

  In this embodiment, a detailed description of portions having the same configuration and processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a hold announcement effect setting process (step S800A) in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, the processing of steps S6009 and S6010 is executed in addition to the processing shown in the first embodiment in the hold announcement effect setting processing. In step S6009, effect control CPU 101 determines whether the change pattern of the hold display determined in step S6007X is any of change patterns 401 to 404, 412, and 414 (change patterns including a change from special hold to normal hold). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S6009). If it is any of the change patterns 401 to 404, 412, and 414, the effect control CPU 101 sets a restriction flag indicating that the change from the special hold to the normal hold is limited (step S6010).

  It should be noted that the restriction flag set in step S6010 indicates that when the hold display changed from the special hold to the normal hold is exhausted, when the change display corresponding to the hold display is started or ended, the effect symbol change start is started. It is reset in the processing and the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing.

  In this embodiment, in the process of step S6005X, the final display mode of the hold display is determined using a final display mode determination table different from the process of step S6005 shown in the first embodiment (step S6005X). .

  FIGS. 55 and 56 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the final display mode determination table according to the second embodiment. However, when the first hold storage number is 2, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode of the hold display using the same final display mode determination table as in FIGS. 38 (A) to 38 (C). I do.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the first suspended storage number stored in the first suspended storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “3” or “4”. If the fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category command indicates a non-reach loss (variation category 1 shown in FIG. 16), if the restriction flag is not set, the hold 3 shown in FIG. If the final display mode determination table for off-limit and non-reach and the restriction flag is turned off is selected and the restriction flag is set, 3 to 4 reservations and non-reach off shown in FIG. In addition, the final display mode determination table for turning on the restriction flag is selected. In addition, if the fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category command indicates a super-reach loss (the fluctuation category 7 shown in FIG. 16), if the restriction flag is not set, the fluctuation category is shown in FIG. 55 (E-1). If the final display mode determination table for holding 3 to 4 pieces and deviating from the super reach and limiting flag is turned off is selected, and the limiting flag is set, 3 to 4 pieces of holding and superimposing shown in FIG. The final display mode determination table for reaching the off-limit state and turning on the restriction flag is selected. If the fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category command indicates a super-reach big hit (the fluctuation categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 17), and if the restriction flag is not set, FIG. 56 (F-1) When the final display mode determination table for the 3-4 reserves, the super-reach big hit and the restriction flag OFF shown in FIG. 5 is selected, and the restriction flag is set, the 3-4 reserves shown in FIG. Further, the final display mode determination table for the super reach jackpot and the restriction flag ON is selected. Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on the random number using the selected final display mode determination table, and determines the latest display mode of the latest suspended display.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the process of step S6007X, a change pattern of the hold display is determined using a change pattern determination table different from the process of step S6007 shown in the first embodiment (step S6007X). .

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of the change pattern determination table according to the second embodiment. However, the effect control CPU 101 sets the change pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 40 (A) to (E) and FIGS. 41 (F) to (H) as those change patterns shown in the first embodiment. The change pattern of the hold display is determined using the same table as the determination table.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “4”, and the fluctuation indicated by the fluctuation category command. If the category is a super-reach big hit (variable categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 17), and if the red display is determined as the final display mode, if the restriction flag is not set, hold 4 If the change flag is set, the change pattern determination table for four super hits, the super reach big hit, the red hold, and the limit flag on is selected when the limit flag is set. Select a table.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in this embodiment, when the restriction flag is set (that is, when a hold display changed from special hold to normal hold is displayed), normal hold ( (With special hold). Further, as shown in FIG. 57, in the present embodiment, when the restriction flag is set, the change patterns 411 and 414 including the change from the special hold to the normal hold are not determined. . With such a configuration, in this embodiment, when the special hold changes from the normal hold to the normal hold, another hold display changes from the special hold to the normal hold until the hold display changed to the normal hold is consumed. There are no restrictions.

  In this embodiment, when the restriction flag is set (when the hold display changed from special hold to normal hold is displayed), the other hold display may change from special hold to normal hold. Although the case where the restriction is set so as not to be restricted is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the restriction may be performed by lowering the rate at which the other hold display changes from the special hold to the normal hold.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the number of specific displays displayed in the third mode is limited (in this example, when the limit flag is set (that is, from special hold to normal hold) Is changed, the change patterns 411 and 414 including the normal hold (with special hold) and the change from the special hold to the normal hold are not determined). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the change effect is performed.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
In the first embodiment, the case where the hold display is changed to a display mode (blue hold or red hold) having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode has been described. However, the hold display can be changed to a display mode indicating the effect contents. May be configured. Hereinafter, a third embodiment in which the hold display is changeable to a display mode suggesting the effect contents will be described.

  In this embodiment, a detailed description of portions having the same configuration and processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the case where the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b are provided has been described. However, in this embodiment, the total number of hold storage is displayed instead. It is assumed that a total suspension storage display unit is provided. It should be noted that the configuration shown in this embodiment is applied not only to the mode shown in this embodiment but also to a gaming machine having the first hold storage display section 9a and the second hold storage display section 9b. Is also good.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the case where the normal jackpot, the probable big hit, and the sudden probable big hit are provided as the big hit types, but in this embodiment, instead of these, the 15R probable big hit, 8R It is assumed that a probability variable jackpot and a sudden probability variable jackpot are provided.

  In the present embodiment, as the display mode of the hold display displayed on the combined hold storage display unit, a normal display mode indicating the reliability of being a 15R / 8R probability change jackpot, and an effect suggestion indicating execution of a predetermined effect And a display mode.

  The normal display mode includes “white” displayed in white, “red” displayed in red, and “gold” displayed in gold, and the reliability of a 15R / 8R probability change big hit. Is gold> red> white.

  The effect suggestion display mode includes a first special suggestion mode that indicates that a special zone effect is to be announced by displaying the characters “special” and a special zone effect that displays the characters “special?”. A second special suggestion mode indicating that the subject is a notice subject of the above, a pseudo-link suggestion mode indicating that the pseudo-run is to be executed by displaying the character "NEXT", and displaying the character "SP" And a SP suggesting mode that suggests that the system will develop into super reach. The first special suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the special zone effect is to be announced, whereas the second special suggestion mode is selected regardless of whether the special zone effect is to be announced. This is a display mode to be obtained. In addition, the pseudo-link suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the pseudo-link is executed, and the SP suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when developing into super reach.

  Note that the special zone effect is an effect of displaying a special background different from a normal background by one change or a plurality of continuous changes. In addition, the special zone effect has a configuration in which the greater the number of executions, the higher the reliability with respect to the 15R / 8R probability change jackpot. Hereinafter, starting the execution of the special zone effect may be referred to as “entering the special zone”. Immediately before entering the special zone, a successful entry effect is executed. The entry success production is a production that indicates that it is decided to enter the special zone after suggesting entry into the special zone (for example, as shown in FIGS. 64 (4) and (5) described later, “special entry”). The effect of displaying “Success!” After displaying “Zone Chance!”). In addition, when not entering the special zone, an entry failure effect that gives a sense of expectation to the player by suggesting entry into the special zone may be executed. For example, after suggesting that the vehicle enters the special zone in the same manner as the successful entry performance, an effect indicating that the vehicle does not enter the special zone (for example, "Failure ..." is displayed after "Special zone chance!" Is displayed) Direction) can be executed as a rush failure effect. Hereinafter, the entry success production and the entry failure production may be collectively referred to as “entry announcement production”. The rush notice effect is an effect performed for 3 seconds from the start of the change. Then, when the vehicle enters the special zone, the special zone effect is started three seconds after the start of the change (at the end of the successful entry effect). In addition, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation | variation which performs a rush announcement effect is shorter than 3 seconds, the rush announcement effect shall be forcibly terminated one second before the fluctuation stop. At that time, when entering the special zone, the successful entry effect is forcibly terminated and the special zone effect is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the combined hold storage display unit, the hold display for the hold storage that has not yet been changed is performed, and the change display for the hold storage is started until the change display is completed. The hold display for the hold storage is continuously displayed on the active display unit different from the combined hold storage display unit. That is, an active display (variable display corresponding image) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed on the active display unit. The active display is an image indicating the reliability of occurrence of a big hit based on a change during execution. The display mode of the active display is the same as the above-mentioned hold display mode (“white”, “red”, “gold” which is the normal display mode, the first special suggestion mode and the second special suggestion display effect presentation mode). Suggestion mode, pseudo-link suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode).

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display and the active display is determined when the corresponding hold storage is generated (at the time of starting winning). Specifically, when a start winning is generated, first, a change mode of the normal display mode (a hold change pattern and a change timing described later) is determined, and then it is determined whether or not to display in the effect suggestion display mode. I do. When it is determined not to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display is started in the normal display mode from the timing of the start winning. Further, when it is determined that the display is to be performed in the presentation suggestion display mode, the display of the hold display is started in the presentation suggestion display mode from the timing of the start winning, and the presentation of the suggestion content is performed (for example, 5 seconds after starting the special zone production, 5 seconds after performing re-variation in the pseudo-run, 5 seconds after starting super reach, or when it is determined not to execute (for example, rush failure) When the effect is performed), the display is changed to the normal suggestion display mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the effect control process process (step S705), a hold display control process for controlling the hold display is executed. FIGS. 58 and 59 are flowcharts showing the hold display control process according to the third embodiment. In the hold display control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a hold change pattern determination lottery for determining a hold change pattern of the hold display for a newly generated hold memory (step S3701). Specifically, a pending change pattern is determined using the pending change pattern determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 60A is an explanatory diagram showing a pending change pattern determination table. A determination value corresponding to the pending change pattern is assigned to each pending change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60 (A) according to the prize-winning determination result (15R probable big hit or 8R probable big hit, out of super reach, etc.). However, in the example shown in FIG. 60A, the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for simplification of the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for a lottery determination to determine a pending change pattern, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, if the prize-winning determination result is a 15R probability change hit or an 8R probability change hit, P01 at a rate of 10%, P02 at a rate of 15%, P03 at a rate of 20%, P04 at a rate of 25%, P05 is determined as a pending change pattern at a rate of 30%.

  For example, if the prize-winning determination result is a super-reach loss, P01 is 70%, P02 is 15%, P03 is 7%, P04 is 5%, and P04 is 3%. , P05 is determined as the pending change pattern.

  For example, if the result of the winning determination is other, P01 is determined as the pending change pattern at a rate of 100%.

  By determining the hold change pattern at such a ratio, the reliability of the hold display or the active display for the 15R certain change big hit or the 8R certain change big hit has white <red <gold.

  Further, the pending change pattern in the present embodiment is a pending change pattern that does not become “red” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “no red”; for example, P01), and a pending change pattern that becomes “red” (hereinafter, referred to as “red”). There is also a case where “red is present.” For example, other than P01.) Therefore, the selection ratio of red and non-red is shown in FIG.

  As shown in the figure, if the winning determination result is a 15R probability change jackpot or an 8R probability change hit, red is selected at a rate of 90% and no red is selected at a rate of 10%. If the winning determination result is out of super reach, red is selected at a rate of 30% and no red is selected at a rate of 70%. If the result of the prize-winning determination is other, the absence of red is selected at a rate of 100%.

  In this embodiment, when the selection ratio of execution of the special zone effect is compared with the selection ratio with red shown in FIG. 60 (B), when the prize-winning-time determination result is 15R probable big hit or 8R probable big hit, If the selection ratio with red is higher than the ratio for executing the special zone effect, but the winning judgment result is out of super reach, the selection ratio with red is lower than the ratio for executing the special zone effect. Has become. Therefore, when red is selected, the reliability with respect to the 15R probable big hit or the 8R probable big hit is higher than when the execution of the special zone effect is selected. That is, in the present embodiment, the display of the hold display or the active display in the display mode of “red” is configured to have higher reliability than the special zone effect.

  In the present embodiment, P02 to P05 can be selected only when the winning determination result is the 15R probability change hit, the 8R probability change hit, or the super reach is lost, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, P02 to P05 may be selectable even if the prize-winning determination result is suddenly changed big hit, small hit, out of normal reach or out of non-reach.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 stores the data indicating the pending change pattern determined in step S3701 in a storage area (a storage area corresponding to the total number of reserved storages) in the start winning command storage area, thereby changing the pending change. The pattern is stored (step S3702). If the stored change pattern is a change pattern with no change (P01 or P03), the flow shifts to step S3710. If the stored change pattern is a change pattern with change (any of P02, P04, and P05), a change timing determination lottery for determining a change timing is performed (step S3704). Specifically, the change timing is determined using the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61A or the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61B.

  FIG. 61A is an explanatory diagram showing a first change timing determination lottery table. FIG. 61B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second change timing determination lottery table. The determination values corresponding to the change timings are assigned to the change timing determination lottery tables shown in FIGS. 61 (A) and (B) for each of the total number of pending storages, and are shown in FIGS. 61 (A) and (B). In the example, for simplification of the description, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for a change timing determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  First, the case where the change timing determination lottery is performed using the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61A will be described. The first change timing determination lottery table is a change timing determination lottery table used when the result of the winning determination is a big hit.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “1”, the change timing is determined to be “active” at a rate of 60% and “active start time” at a rate of 40%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “2”, the change timing is determined to be “active” at a rate of 50%, “active start time” at a rate of 30%, and “first” at a rate of 20%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “3”, active at a rate of 40%, active start at a rate of 30%, first at a rate of 20%, and two at a rate of 10% The eye is determined as the change timing.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is "4", the active status is 30%, the active status is 25%, the first status is 20%, and the status is 2 at 15%. The third eye is determined at a rate of 10% as the change timing.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is "5", the active status is 22%, the active status is 20%, the first status is 18%, and the active status is 2% at 16%. The third eye is determined as the change timing at a rate of 14%, and the fourth eye at a rate of 10%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is "6", the active status is 22%, the active status is 18%, the first status is 16%, and the second status is 14%. The third eye is determined as the change timing at the rate of 12%, the fourth eye at the rate of 10%, and the fifth eye at the rate of 8%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is “7”, the active status is 20%, the active status is 18%, the first status is 16%, and the active status is 2% at 14%. The third eye is determined as the change timing at the rate of 12%, the fourth eye at the rate of 10%, the fifth eye at the rate of 6%, and the sixth eye at the rate of 4%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is "8", the active status is 20%, the active status is 18%, the first status is 16%, and the second status is 14%. 3 eyes at 12%, 4 eyes at 8%, 5 eyes at 6%, 6 eyes at 4%, 7 eyes at 2% The eye is determined as the change timing.

  Next, a case where the change timing determination lottery is performed using the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61B will be described. The second change timing determination lottery table is a change timing determination lottery table used when the winning determination result is out of super reach.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “1”, the change timing is determined to be “active” at a rate of 40% and “active start time” at a rate of 60%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “2”, the active state is determined as the change timing at a rate of 20%, the start time of the active state at a rate of 30%, and the first one at a rate of 50%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “3”, active at a rate of 10%, active start at a rate of 20%, first at a rate of 30%, and two at a rate of 40% The eye is determined as the change timing.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is “4”, the active status is 10%, the active status is 15%, the first status is 20%, and the second status is 25%. The third eye is determined as the change timing at a rate of 30%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is "5", active at a rate of 10%, active start at a rate of 14%, first at a rate of 16%, and two at a rate of 18% The third eye is determined as the change timing at a rate of 20%, and the fourth eye at a rate of 22%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is "6", the active status is 8%, the active status is 10%, the first status is 12%, and the second status is 14%. The third eye is determined as the change timing at a rate of 16%, the fourth eye at a rate of 18%, and the fifth eye at a rate of 22%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “7”, the active status is 4%, the active status is 6%, the first status is 10%, and the second status is 12%. The third eye is determined as a change timing at a rate of 14%, the fourth eye at a 16% rate, the fifth eye at an 18% rate, and the sixth eye at a 20% rate.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is “8”, the active state is 2%, the active state is started at 4%, the first is 6%, and the 2 is 8%. Third eye at 12% ratio, fourth eye at 14% ratio, fifth eye at 16% ratio, sixth eye at 18% ratio, seven eye at 20% ratio The eye is determined as the change timing.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is easier to determine an earlier time from the start of the hold display as the change timing in the case of the loss than in the case of the big hit. Therefore, as the timing at which the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes, the later the start of the hold display, the higher the reliability of the big hit. Conversely, the configuration may be such that the earlier the on-hold display is started, the higher the reliability of the big hit, or the change timing may not indicate the reliability of the big hit.

  In the present embodiment, when the prize-winning determination result is neither a big hit nor a super-reach loss (other cases), only P01 can be selected as the pending change pattern. Although the determination lottery table is not provided, any other change timing determination lottery table may be provided as long as it is configured to be able to select the pending change pattern in which the display mode changes. Is also good.

  After that, the effect control CPU 101 stores the determined change timing in the start winning command storage area (step S3705). If the pending change pattern stored in step S3702 is the pending change pattern with two changes (ie, P04) (Y in step S3706), the change timing determination lottery is performed again (step S3707), and the determination is made. If the change timing thus determined is different from the change timing stored in step S3705 (N in step S3708), the change timing determined in step S3707 is stored in the start winning command storage area (step S3709). If the change timing determined in step S3707 is the same as the change timing stored in step S3705 (Y in step S3708), a change timing determination lottery (step S3705) is performed until a change timing different from the change timing stored in step S3705 is determined. Step S3707) is repeatedly executed. Thereby, two different change timings are determined. Note that a plurality of combination patterns of two change timings are provided, and two change timings may be collectively determined by selecting one of them.

  After that, the effect control CPU 101 executes a process related to displaying the hold display in the effect suggestion display mode (steps S3710 to S3725). The process specifically includes a first process (steps S3710 to S3713) related to displaying a hold display in the first special suggestion mode and a second process related to displaying a hold display in the second special suggestion mode. The process (steps S3714 to S3717), the third process related to displaying the hold display in the pseudo continuous suggestion mode (steps S3718 to S3721), and the fourth process related to displaying the hold display in the SP suggestive mode (step S3718) S3722 to S3725).

  Hereinafter, the hold display in the first special suggestion mode is “first special suggestion hold”, the hold display in the second special suggestion mode is “second special suggestion hold”, and the hold display in the pseudo continuous suggestion mode is “pseudo continuous suggestion hold”. , The hold indication in the SP suggestion mode may be referred to as “SP suggestion hold”.

  First, effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a new hold storage is scheduled to enter a special zone to be notified (step S3710). For example, a flag is set when it is determined to enter the special zone, and if the flag is set, it is determined that a new hold storage is scheduled to enter the special zone to be notified. .

  If the new hold storage is going to enter the special zone to be notified, a first special suggestion execution lottery for determining whether to display the first special suggestion hold is performed (step S3711). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to execute the first special suggestion suspension using the first special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 62A is an explanatory diagram showing a first special suggestion execution lottery table. In the first special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (A), a determination value corresponding to the presence / absence of display of the first special suggestion hold is assigned to each of the winning determination result and the hold change pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 62A, the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for simplification of the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the first special suggestion execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the prize-winning determination result is a 15R probability change jackpot or an 8R probability change hit, if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the first special suggestion hold is executed at a rate of 40% at a rate of 60%. It is determined not to perform the display of the first special suggestion suspension. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the first special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 80% and the display of the first special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 20%. You.

  For example, if the winning determination result is out of super reach, if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the first special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 30%, but the first special suggestion is displayed at a rate of 70%. It is decided not to perform a pending display. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the first special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 60% and the display of the first special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 40%. You.

  If it is determined to execute the display of the first special suggestion suspension, the display of the first special suggestion suspension is started as the suspension display for the new suspension storage (step S3713).

  If the new hold storage is not scheduled to enter the special zone to be notified in step S3710, or if the display of the first special suggestion hold is not executed in step S3712, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the new hold storage is to enter the special zone to be notified. Perform a notice effect (if you are going to move to a special zone (if you are going to execute a successful entry), or if you are not going to move to a special zone but you are going to execute an inrush failure effect. Is included) (step S3714). For example, a flag is set when it is determined to enter a special zone, and if the flag is set, it is determined that a new hold storage is to execute a successful entry entry effect of a notice target. It is. Also, for example, a flag is set when it is determined to execute an inrush failure effect, and if the flag is set, a new hold memory is scheduled to execute an inrush failure effect of a notice target. It is to judge.

  When the rush notice effect is scheduled to be executed, a second special suggestion execution lottery for determining whether or not to display the second special suggestion hold is performed (step S3715). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to execute the display of the second special suggestion suspension using the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 62 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a second special suggestion execution lottery table. In the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 61 (B), a rush success effect is executed as a determination result corresponding to the prize-winning determination result and the presence / absence of display of the second special suggestion hold for each hold change pattern. Although different values are assigned for the case of performing and the case of performing the entry failure effect, in the example shown in FIG. 62 (B), for simplification of the description, the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown. I have. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the second special suggestion execution lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  First, a case where the winning determination result is a 15R probability variable hit or an 8R probability variable hit will be described.

  For example, when a successful entry effect is scheduled to be executed (when shifting to a special zone), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold can be executed at a rate of 40%. , 60% is not to be displayed. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 80% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 20%. You.

  For example, when the entry failure effect is scheduled to be executed (when it is not scheduled to shift to the special zone), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold can be executed at a rate of 80%. , 20% not to display the second special suggestion hold. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 40% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 60%. You.

  Next, a case in which the winning determination result is a super-reach loss will be described.

  For example, when a successful entry effect is scheduled to be executed (when shifting to a special zone), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold can be executed at a rate of 30%. , 70% of the time is not displayed. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 60% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 40%. You.

  For example, when the entry failure production is scheduled to be executed (when the transition to the special zone is not planned), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold can be executed at a rate of 60%. , 40% is not to be displayed. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 30% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 70%. You.

  Lastly, a case where the winning determination result is other will be described.

  For example, when the entry failure production is scheduled to be executed (when the transition to the special zone is not planned), the display of the second special suggestion suspension is not executed at a rate of 100% in any of the suspension change patterns. Is determined. In the present embodiment, when the result of the prize-winning determination is other than the above, since the configuration does not enter the special zone, it is determined whether or not the display of the second special suggestion suspension is to be performed when performing the entry success production. No decision value has been assigned for the decision.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold display can be displayed in the second special suggestion mode only when the prize-winning determination result is the 15R certain change big hit, the 8R certain change big hit, or the super reach is lost. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the prize-winning determination result is a sudden change big hit, a small hit, a normal reach loss, or a non-reach loss, the hold display may be displayed in the second special suggestion mode. Good.

  Further, as described above, when the hold change pattern is other than P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a higher rate in the case of executing the rush success effect than in the case of executing the rush failure effect. It is configured. That is, when the display of the second special suggestion suspension is executed, the display mode is more likely to change to “red” when entering the special zone than when not entering the special zone. Note that the display mode may not be changed to “red” when the vehicle does not enter the special zone.

  Here, the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (B) is compared with the selection ratio of red hold shown in FIG. 60 (B). For example, when the prize-winning determination result is the 15R probability change hit or the 8R probability change hit, the selection rate with red is 90% (see FIG. 60B), but the execution rate of the second special suggestion hold is 90%. % (See FIG. 62B). For example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach, the selection ratio with red is 30% (see FIG. 60 (B)), but the execution ratio of the second special suggestion hold is 30% or more. (See FIG. 62 (B)). Therefore, the reliability of the 15R probability change jackpot or the 8R probability change hit is red hold> second special suggestion hold.

  When it is determined to execute the display of the second special suggestion suspension, the display of the second special suggestion suspension is started as the suspension display for the new suspension storage (step S3717).

  In a case where the new hold storage does not execute the rush announcement effect of the announcement target in Step S3714, or does not execute the display of the second special suggestion hold in Step S3716, the effect control CPU 101 causes the new hold storage to accompany the pseudo-sequence. It is determined whether or not the pseudo consecutive suspension is set (step S3718). If it is a pseudo consecutive suggestion hold, a pseudo consecutive suggestion execution lottery for determining whether or not to display the pseudo consecutive suggestion hold is performed (step S3719). More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the pseudo-link suggestion suspension using the pseudo-link suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (C).

  FIG. 62 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo consecutive suggestion execution lottery table. In the pseudo consecutive suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (C), determination values corresponding to the presence / absence of execution of display of pseudo consecutive suggestion suspension are assigned for each winning determination result and each suspension change pattern. In the example shown in (C), the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown for simplification of the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for a pseudo consecutive suggestion execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the prize-winning determination result is a big hit, if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the pseudo-link suggestion hold is executed at a rate of 20%, and the display of the pseudo-link suggestion hold is displayed at a rate of 80%. It is decided not to run. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the pseudo-link suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 30% and the display of the pseudo-link suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 70%.

  For example, when the winning determination result is incorrect, if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the pseudo-link suggestion hold is executed at a rate of 10%, and the display of the pseudo-link suggestion hold is displayed at a rate of 90%. It is decided not to run. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the pseudo continuous suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 20% and the display of the pseudo continuous suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 80%.

  If it is determined that the display of the pseudo-link suggestion hold is to be executed, the display of the pseudo-link suggestion hold is started as the hold display for the new hold storage (step S3721).

  If the new hold storage is not the pseudo continuous hold in step S3718, or if the display of the pseudo continuous suggestion hold is not executed in step S3720, effect control CPU 101 is the SP reach hold in which the new hold storage evolves into a super reach. It is determined whether or not this is the case (step S3722). If the SP reach is suspended, a SP suggestion execution lottery for determining whether or not to display the SP suggestion suspension is performed (step S3723). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the SP suggestion suspension using the SP suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (D).

  FIG. 62D is an explanatory diagram showing an SP suggestion execution lottery table. In the SP suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (D), determination values corresponding to the presence / absence of execution of display of SP suggestion suspension are assigned for each winning result determination result and suspension change pattern. In the example shown in parentheses), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for simplification of the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for SP suggestion execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the winning determination result is a big hit, if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the SP suggestion hold is executed at a rate of 30%, but the display of the SP suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 70%. Is determined. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that display of SP suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 40% and display of SP suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 60%.

  For example, when the winning determination result is incorrect, if the change pattern of the hold is P01, the display of the SP suggestion hold is executed at a rate of 20%, but the display of the SP suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 80%. Is determined. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that display of SP suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 30% and that display of SP suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 70%.

  If it is determined that the hold display in the SP suggestion mode is to be executed, the display of the SP suggestion hold is started as the hold display for the new hold storage (step S3725).

  Here, comparing the pseudo-link suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (C) with the SP suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (D), when the pending change pattern is other than P01, The execution ratio of the display of the suggestion suspension and the execution ratio of the display of the SP suggestion suspension are different. That is, the effect suggestion display mode is changed to "red" at a different rate based on the type of the effect suggestion display mode. This allows the user to pay attention to the type of the effect suggestion display mode.

  If the new hold storage is not the SP reach hold in step S3722, or if the display of the SP suggestion hold is not executed in step S3724, the effect control CPU 101 uses a display mode according to the hold change pattern stored in step S3702. The display of the hold display for the new hold storage is started (step S3726). Specifically, if any of P01, P02, and P04, the hold display is started with "white", and if it is P03 or P05, the hold display is started with "red".

  In the present embodiment, as shown in steps S3710 to S3725, the display timing of the hold display of the effect suggestion mode is the start winning, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold display or the active display of the effect suggestion mode may be displayed at any timing, such as when shifting the hold display, during the fluctuation display, or during the active display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the processing is executed in the order of the first processing, the second processing, the third processing, and the fourth processing, so that the execution priority (that is, the execution frequency) is the first special suggestion mode> second processing. It is conceivable that the special suggestion mode> pseudo-link suggestion mode> SP suggestion mode. Therefore, for example, it is possible to collectively determine which one of the first special suggestion mode, the second special suggestion mode, the pseudo continuous suggestion mode, and the SP suggestion mode displays the hold display or the active display. By providing a simple table, it is possible to prevent the execution priority (execution frequency) from being biased. Alternatively, even if a lottery is sequentially performed as to whether or not to perform the hold display or the active display in each of the effect suggestion display modes as in the present embodiment, the execution ratio is lower as the lottery performed earlier is performed. By doing (making the execution ratio higher as the lottery executed later), it is possible to prevent the execution priority (execution frequency) from being biased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hold display can be displayed only in a single effect suggestion display mode among the plurality of effect suggestion display modes, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold display may be displayed in a plurality of effect suggestion display modes. For example, when it is determined that the hold display is performed in the first special suggestion display mode and the SP suggestion display mode, the hold display including the characters “special” and the characters “SP” is displayed. Is also good. Specifically, the first processing to the fourth processing described above may be independently executed to display the hold display in a plurality of effect suggestion display modes. In addition, since the announcement effect suggested by the first special suggestion display mode and the second special suggestion display mode is a special zone presentation, the hold display is performed in both the first special suggestion display mode and the second special suggestion display mode. It may be configured not to execute. For example, the hold display of the first special suggestion display mode may be displayed with higher priority than the hold display of the second special suggestion display mode.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation processing (step S802) in the third embodiment. In the effect symbol change processing, it is determined whether or not it is the change timing of the active display (step S4701). Specifically, in the above-described active information storage area, active is stored as the change timing, and when a predetermined time (for example, 13 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the change, it is determined that the active display is the change timing. . In addition, as described above, although the active time is stored as the change timing, when the corresponding change time of the change is shorter than 13 seconds, one second before the stop of the change is determined as the change timing of the active display. Shall be. If it is the change timing of the active display, the display mode of the active display is changed with reference to the hold change pattern in the active information storage area (step S4702). For example, if the pending change pattern is P02, it is changed to "red", and if it is P04 or P05, it is changed to "gold".

  If the hold display or the active display is displayed in the first special suggestion mode (Y in step S4703), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the successful entry effect (step S4704). Specifically, when a successful entry performance is started in a variation having a variation time of 3 seconds or more, it is determined that the timing at which 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the successful entry performance is the end timing of the successful entry performance. If the successful entry effect is started during the change having the change time of less than 3 seconds, the timing one second before the stop of the change is determined to be the end timing of the successful entry effect. If it is the end timing of the successful entry effect, the display mode of the hold display or the active display displayed in the first special suggestion mode is changed to a display mode corresponding to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4705). More specifically, if the pending change pattern is P01, it is “white”, if it is P02, it is “white” if it is before the change timing, if it is after the change timing, it is “red”. If it is P03, it will be "red"; if it is P04, it will be "white" before both change timings; if it is after one change timing but before the other change timing, it will be "red". If it is after both change timings, it is changed to "gold", if it is P05, it is changed to "red" before the change timing, and to "gold" after the change timing.

  In addition, when the variation time of the variation that executed the successful entry performance is less than 8 seconds (the period for executing the successful entry performance (3 seconds), the display of the hold display or the active display after the completion of the successful entry performance) In the case where the fluctuation time is shorter than the total period including the standby period (5 seconds) until the mode is changed), the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed one second before the fluctuation stop.

  When the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode (Y in step S4706), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the rush announcement effect (entry successful effect or rush failure effect). Is determined (step S4707). Specifically, when the rush announcement effect is started in a fluctuation having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds or more, it is determined that the timing at which 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the rush announcement effect is the end timing of the rush announcement effect. If the rush announcement effect is started during a fluctuation having a fluctuation time of less than 3 seconds, the timing one second before the stop of the fluctuation is determined to be the end timing of the rush announcement effect. If it is the end timing of the rush notice effect, the display mode of the hold display or the active display displayed in the second special suggestion mode is changed to a display mode corresponding to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4708). More specifically, if the pending change pattern is P01, it is “white”, if it is P02, it is “white” if it is before the change timing, if it is after the change timing, it is “red”. If it is P03, it will be "red"; if it is P04, it will be "white" before both change timings; if it is after one change timing but before the other change timing, it will be "red". If it is after both change timings, it is changed to "gold", if it is P05, it is changed to "red" before the change timing, and to "gold" after the change timing.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation which performed the rush announcement effect is less than 8 seconds (the period for executing the rush announcement effect (3 seconds), the display of the hold display or the active display after the end of the rush announcement effect) In the case where the fluctuation time is shorter than the total period including the standby period (5 seconds) until the mode is changed), the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed one second before the fluctuation stop.

  If the active display is displayed in the pseudo-link suggestion mode (Y in step S4709), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the pseudo-link (step S4710). More specifically, in the pseudo-run, the re-change is generally started after the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, but in step S4710, the first re-change timing is determined as the start timing of the pseudo-run. . The stop timing of the first chance symbol may be determined as the start timing of the pseudo-run.

  If it is the start timing of the pseudo-run, the display mode of the active display displayed in the pseudo-run suggestion mode is changed to a display mode according to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4711). More specifically, if the pending change pattern is P01, it is “white”, if it is P02, it is “white” if it is before the change timing, if it is after the change timing, it is “red”. If it is P03, it will be "red", if it is P04, it will be "red" if it is after one change timing but before the other change timing, and it will be "gold) if it is after both change timings. , P05, it is changed to "red" before the change timing, and to "gold" after the change timing.

  Note that a variation pattern is provided in which the variation ends before 5 seconds elapse from the start timing of the pseudo-run, and when the display mode of the active display is changed during the variation of the variation pattern, a predetermined variation stop is set. The display mode of the active display may be changed before the time (for example, one second before).

  If the active display is displayed in the SP suggestion mode (Y in step S4712), it is determined whether it is time to start the super reach effect (step S4713). Specifically, the timing determined in advance for each variation pattern is determined as the start timing of the super reach effect. If it is the start timing of the super reach effect, the display mode of the active display displayed in the SP suggestion mode is changed to the display mode corresponding to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4714). More specifically, if the pending change pattern is P01, it is “white”, if it is P02, it is “white” if it is before the change timing, if it is after the change timing, it is “red”. If it is P03, it will be "red", if it is P04, it will be "red" if it is after one change timing but before the other change timing, and it will be "gold) if it is after both change timings. , P05, it is changed to "red" before the change timing, and to "gold" after the change timing.

  Note that a fluctuation pattern is provided in which the fluctuation ends before 5 seconds elapse from the start timing of the super reach effect, and when the display mode of the active display is changed during the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation stop is performed. The display mode of the active display may be changed a predetermined time before (for example, one second before).

  After that, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the process timer by one (step S8101) and decrements the value of the variable time timer by one (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). In addition, the control state of the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S8105).

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S8115), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S8116).

  FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 are explanatory diagrams showing display examples when the hold display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode in the third embodiment. First, during a change in which (1) the active display and the two pending displays are displayed, (2) a new pending storage occurs and the pending display corresponding to the pending storage is in the second special suggestion mode (" Special? "). At this time, it is determined that the special zone effect for which the reserved storage is to be notified is set to be executed, and that the number of executions K is set to “3” and the remaining number of times R is set to “3”. It is also assumed that P04 is determined as the pending change pattern, and the first and second timings are determined as the change timing.

  Then, (3) the change ends at the gap, and (4) the next change starts. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new change is displayed, and the hold display is shifted. Then, since the remaining number R becomes “2” and the value obtained by adding “1” to the remaining number R becomes equal to the number of executions K, the rush notice effect is executed. After 3 seconds have passed, (5) it is notified that the entry was successful, and the vehicle enters the special zone. Five seconds later, (6) the display mode of the hold display displayed in the second special suggestion mode changes to “red” (see step S4708).

  Thereafter, the change ends at (7), and (8) the next change starts. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new change is displayed, and the hold display is shifted. The hold change pattern of the hold display displayed in “red” is P04, and the change timing includes the first one, so that the display mode changes to “gold”.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, a gaming machine that can execute variable display, and displays a specific display corresponding to the variable display (in this example, a hold display and an active display) at least normally The aspect (“white” in this example), the first specific aspect (“red” in this example) having a higher degree of expectation than the normal aspect, and the second specific aspect (in this example, production Specific display means that can be displayed in any of display modes including a suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion mode, pseudo continuous suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode) (in this example, for effect control (Steps S3713, S3717, S3721, S3725, S3726, S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, and S4714 in the microcomputer 100) and the specific display in the second specific mode. Effect executing means capable of executing an effect of the suggested content (in the present example, processing similar to steps S8013 and S8105 in the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the process table selected in the processing similar to steps S8010 and S8011) Executing a special zone effect, a pseudo-ream, and a super reach effect), the specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, and then displays the specific display in the second specific mode. When the effect of the content suggested by the specific display is executed (in this example, 5 seconds after the effect of the suggested content is executed), the display mode of the specific display is changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode. (In this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs steps S4702, S4705, S4708, and S47 By executing 1, S4714, if any of P02 to P05 is selected as the hold change pattern, the hold display or the active display displayed in the effect suggestion display mode, which is the second display mode, is displayed. , Can be changed to “red” which is the first specific mode). As a result, an expectation for the specific mode can be increased.

  When the configuration shown in this embodiment is applied to the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, for example, the first specific mode or the second specific mode shown in the present embodiment may be changed to the first specific embodiment. After the specific display is displayed in the first mode (special hold), the state changes from the first mode (special hold) to the first specific mode or the second specific mode. It is possible to configure.

  Further, the gaming machine can be configured by appropriately combining the configurations described in the first to third embodiments described above. That is, the configurations shown in any one of the first to third embodiments described above are appropriately combined, or the configurations shown in all the embodiments are combined. A game machine may be configured.

[Multiple production modes related to hold display and active display]
With respect to the above-mentioned holding notice effect in which the display mode of the hold display is changed, and the effect in which the display mode of the active display is changed (hereinafter, also referred to as an active notice effect), the execution ratio of the effect is different depending on the effect mode. May be configured. Hereinafter, an example in which the execution ratio of the hold announcement effect and the execution ratio of the active announcement effect are made different according to the effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 66A is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect mode selection screen selectable by a player. The effect mode selection screen in the present embodiment is displayed by operating the push button 120 during a period in which the game state is the normal state and the effect control CPU 101 is performing the customer waiting demonstration. On the effect mode selection screen, three effect modes of “sunny mode”, “rain mode”, and “lightning mode” can be selected.

  On the effect mode selection screen, the player operates the stick controller 122 to move the cursor displayed on the screen to the position where the icon 900a of “sunny mode” is displayed, and operates the push button 120. "Sunny mode" is selected as the effect mode. When the “sunny mode” is selected, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the effect control CPU 101 sets the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 to a clear image representing a sunny scenery including the sun and mountains. Switch to image. Then, the subsequent variation display of the effect symbols is executed using the fine image as the background image.

  On the effect mode selection screen, the player operates the stick controller 122, moves the cursor displayed on the screen to the position where the icon 900b of the “rain mode” is displayed, and operates the push button 120. "Rain mode" is selected as the effect mode. When the “rain mode” is selected, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), the effect control CPU 101 sets the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 to a rain scene showing rain scenes including rain clouds and raindrops. Switch to image. Then, the subsequent variation display of the effect symbol is executed using the rain image as the background image.

  On the effect mode selection screen, the player operates the stick controller 122 to move the cursor displayed on the screen to the position where the “thunder mode” icon 900c is displayed, and then operates the push button 120. Is selected as the lightning mode. When the “lightning mode” is selected, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), the effect control CPU 101 sets the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 to a lightning scene showing a thunder cloud and a lightning scene including lightning. Switch to image. The subsequent display of the effect symbols is executed with the lightning image as the background image.

  The background image in the fine mode, the background image in the rain mode, and the background image in the lightning mode are all applied as background images in the normal state (S640 described above). Is displayed (S643 described above), and if the gaming state is the probable change state, the background image corresponding to the effect mode in the probable change state is displayed (S647 described above).

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 66 (B) and (C), in the fine mode and the rain mode, the active display guide 1000 is displayed at the center of the lower portion of the screen, and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001a to the left of the active display guide. 1001d is displayed, and second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d are displayed on the right side of the active display guide. Each of these is guide information for notifying a player of a position where information corresponding to the variable display (hold display and active display) is to be displayed, and information corresponding to the variable display (hold display and active display) is displayed. This is guide information for allowing the player to easily grasp whether or not the information is displayed.

  The active display guide 1000 displayed at the center of the lower part of the screen indicates the position where the active display is to be displayed. In this example, the black frame located at the upper left, lower left, upper right, and lower right corners It consists of. The active display is displayed in the frame of the active display guide 1000 when the variable display of the effect symbol is being executed, and the active display is displayed in the frame of the active display guide 1000 when the variable display of the effect symbol is not being executed. Not done. In the examples of FIGS. 66 (B) and (C), the active display is displayed in the frame of the active display guide 1000 because it is within the period in which the effect symbol change display is being executed.

  First hold display guides 1001a to 1001d displayed on the lower left side of the screen (first hold storage display section 9a) indicate positions where a hold display corresponding to the first hold storage is to be displayed. It is a downward facing isosceles triangle. Since the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is 4, four first reserved display guides 1001a to 1001d are displayed. For example, when the first reserved storage number is 4, the first reserved display guides 1001a to 1001d are displayed. At the top, a hold display corresponding to the first hold storage is displayed. In the examples of FIGS. 66 (B) and (C), the first hold storage number is 3, so that a hold display corresponding to the first hold storage is displayed above the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001c, respectively. The hold display is not displayed above the first hold display guide 1001d. It can be said that the first hold display guide with no hold display displayed above is display information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol for which the starting condition is not satisfied.

  The second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d displayed on the lower right side of the screen (second hold storage display section 9b) indicate the positions where the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage should be displayed. It is rectangular. Since the upper limit of the second reserved storage number is 4, four second reserved display guides 1002a to 1002d are displayed. For example, when the second reserved storage number is 4, the second reserved display guides 1002a to 1002d are displayed. At the top, a hold display corresponding to the second hold storage is displayed. In the examples of FIGS. 66 (B) and (C), the second hold storage number is 0, and therefore, a hold display corresponding to the second hold storage is located above the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d. Not displayed. It can be said that the second hold display guide in which the hold display is not displayed above is display information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol in which the starting condition is not satisfied.

  When the variable display of the effect symbols is completed, the active display displayed in the frame of the active display guide 1000 is erased, and each hold display (second display) displayed above the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d. The case where the number of reserved storages is 0 and the first number of reserved storages is 1 or more), or each reserved display displayed above the second reserved display guides 1002a to 1002d (when the number of reserved second storages is 1 or more) ) Is shifted to the center side (active display guide 1000 side) by one each.

  In other words, if the second number of stored memories is 0 and the first number of stored memories is 1 or more, the hold display displayed above the first hold display guide 1001a is changed to the active display guide with the execution of the shift effect. Each of the on-hold displays displayed above the first on-hold display guides 1001b to 1001d is shifted above the first on-hold display guides 1001a to 1001d while being shifted and displayed as active displays within the frame of 1000. .

  In addition, when the second hold storage number is 1 or more, the hold display displayed above the second hold display guide 1002a shifts to the active display guide 1000 and becomes active with the execution of the shift effect. Each hold display displayed as a display and above the second hold display guides 1002b to 1002d shifts above the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002c, respectively.

  In the example of the fine mode shown in FIG. 66 (B), the hold display displayed above the first hold display guide 1001b is the target of the hold announcement effect and is set to the red hold. The other hold display displayed above the first hold display guide 1001a and the first hold display guide 1001c, and the active display are in a normal mode. In the example of the rain mode shown in FIG. 66 (C), the hold display and the active display displayed above the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001c are all in the normal mode.

  On the other hand, in the lightning mode shown in FIG. 66 (D), unlike the fine mode and the rain mode, both the active display guide 1000 and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d are provided. Neither the active display nor the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage and the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage are displayed on the screen. In this example, the display information related to the variable display (the active display guide 1000, the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d, the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d, the active display, and the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage). , On-hold display corresponding to the second on-hold storage) is not displayed on the screen. However, such display information is displayed in an extremely low visibility mode, for example, such that the outline of the display information cannot be recognized by the player. May be displayed with low visibility.

  As described above, by selecting the lightning mode as the effect mode, it is possible to prevent the active display and the hold display from being displayed on the screen. If the active display guide 1000, the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d, and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d remain displayed even though the active display and the hold display are not displayed on the screen, the game In the lightning mode, the active display guide 1000 and the first display memory 1000 and the first display memory 1000 may be misunderstood. The reserved display guides 1001a to 1001d and the second reserved display guides 1002a to 1002d are not displayed.

  That is, when the effect control CPU 101 can control the plurality of effect modes in which the visibility of the active display and the hold display are different and the execution ratios of the active notice effect and the hold notice effect are different, the effect selected by the player. By applying an appropriate display layout according to the mode (a display layout related to the active display and the hold display), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Here, if the lightning mode is selected, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to grasp the first number of stored memories and the second number of stored memories. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66 (B) to 66 (D), regardless of the selected effect mode, the effect display device 9 displays the first reserved storage number at the center of the left end of the screen. A first reserved storage number special display area 1011 to be displayed is provided, and a second reserved storage number special display area 1012 for displaying the second reserved storage number is provided at the center of the right end of the screen. In this example, since the first number of reserved storages is 3 and the second number of reserved storages is 0, as shown in FIGS. 66B to 66D, the first reserved number of storage special display area 1011 is displayed. Is displayed as "3", and "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012.

  When the effect control CPU 101 receives the first reserved memory number addition designation command (C000 (H)) from the game control microcomputer 560, the first reserved memory number displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 1011 is displayed. When the display is updated by adding 1 to the number and the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command (C200 (H)) is received, 1 is subtracted from the first reserved storage number displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 1011. The display is updated by subtracting. Further, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the second reserved storage number addition designation command (C100 (H)) from the game control microcomputer 560, the second reserved storage number special display area 1012 is displayed. When the display is updated by adding 1 to the number of reserved storages and the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command (C300 (H)) is received, the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012 is displayed. The display is updated by subtracting 1 from.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays the first reserved storage number stored in the game control microcomputer 560 (the display control is performed on the game control microcomputer 560 side). The storage display 18a and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b which displays the second hold storage number stored in the game control microcomputer 560 (display control is performed on the game control microcomputer 560 side) It has. That is, the main board 31 is provided with a display for performing display update control of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number.

  In the present embodiment, the first received storage number addition designation command (C000 (H)) and the first retained storage number subtraction designation command (C200 (H)), which are commands received from the game control microcomputer 560, In addition, based on the second reserved storage number addition designation command (C100 (H)) and the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command (C300 (H)), the effect control microcomputer 100 side (production control board 80 side) as well. In addition, the display control of the first storage number and the second storage number in the effect display device 9 is performed.

  The display control of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number on the effect control board 80 side is performed in each of a plurality of portions. That is, display control of a plurality of systems (two systems in this example) is performed. First, control is performed to display the number of hold displays corresponding to the first number of hold storages on the first hold display unit 9a, and the number of hold displays corresponding to the second number of hold storages is displayed on the second hold display unit 9b. The second is control for displaying the first reserved storage number in the first reserved storage number special display area 1011 and control for displaying the second reserved storage number in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012. is there. When the production mode is either the sunny mode or the rain mode, both the former and the latter display control are applied, and when the effect mode is the lightning mode, only the latter display control is applied. .

(Performance ratio of notice effect in each effect mode)
As shown in the icons 900a to 900c corresponding to the respective effect modes in FIG. 66 (A), in the fine mode, the execution ratio of the hold notice effect (and the active notice effect) is the highest among the three effect modes, The execution ratio of each effect is set so that the execution ratio of the notice effect during the change (the notice effect for the change display with the start condition satisfied and excluding the active notice effect) is the lowest among the three effect modes. Have been.

  Further, in the rain mode, the execution ratio of the hold notice effect (and the active notice effect) is the second highest among the three effect modes, and the notice effect during the change (the notice effect for the change display in which the start condition is satisfied. The execution ratio of each effect is set so that the execution ratio (excluding the active announcement effect) is the second highest among the three effect modes.

  In the lightning mode, the hold notice effect (and the active notice effect) is not executed (the execution ratio is 0), and the notice effect during the change (the notice effect for the change display in which the start condition is satisfied is the active notice effect). The execution ratio of each effect is set so that the execution ratio (excluding the effect) is the highest among the three effect modes.

  FIG. 67: is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the suspension notice effect in each effect mode. As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 described above, the final display mode (whether or not to execute the hold notice effect) in the hold notice effect is determined based on the latest variable category command and the first hold storage number ( In S6005), when a hold announcement effect is to be executed (Y in S6006), a change pattern is determined based on the latest fluctuation category command, the first number of stored storages, and the determined final display mode (S6007).

  As shown in FIG. 67, (A) [non-reach off-hold, two on hold], (B) [super-reach off, two on hold], (C) [super reach jackpot, two on hold], ( D) [Non-reach off, for 3 to 4 holdings], (E) [Super reach off, for 3 to 4 holdings], and (F) [Super reach big hit, for 3 to 4 holdings] Also in this case, of the three effect modes, the ratio at which the hold announcement effect is executed in the fine mode (the ratio in which the final display mode is one of the normal hold (with special hold via), the blue hold, and the red hold) Is the highest. The allocation of the final display mode in the fine mode is the same as the ratio illustrated in FIGS. 38 and 39.

  Also, (A) [non-reach off-hold, for two hold], (B) [super-reach off-hold, for two hold], (C) [super reach big hit, for two hold], (D) [non-reach In each of the following cases: (e) [for super-reach, 3 to 4 holds], (E) [for super-reach, for 3 to 4 holds], and (F) [super-reach big hit, for 3 to 4 holds] In the mode, the rate at which the hold announcement effect is executed (the rate at which the final display mode is any of the normal hold (with special hold via), the blue hold, and the red hold) is about half of the sunny mode.

  On the other hand, (A) [non-reach off-hold, for two hold], (B) [super-reach off-hold, for two hold], (C) [super reach big hit, for two hold], (D) [non-reach (E) [Super reach out of place, for 3 to 4 holds] and (F) [Super reach big hit, for 3 to 4 holds] In the lightning mode, display information related to the hold display (first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d, second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d, hold display corresponding to the first hold storage, hold corresponding to the second hold storage). (Display) is not displayed, so that the suspended notice effect is not executed (the execution ratio of the suspended notice effect is 0%).

  In the present embodiment, the active announcement effect is also the highest in the sunny mode and the second highest in the rain mode (for example, the active announcement effect is performed at a rate of about half of the sunny mode). In the lightning mode, since the display information (active display and active display guide 1000) related to the active display is not displayed, the active announcement effect is not executed (the execution ratio of the active announcement effect is 0%).

  In the fine mode and the rain mode, display information related to the hold display (first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d, second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d, hold display corresponding to the first hold storage, second hold storage). Is displayed, the shift effect can be executed. On the other hand, in the lightning mode, the shift effect is not executed since the display information related to the hold display is not displayed.

  If the hold display is kept displayed in the lightning mode in which the hold announcement effect is not executed, the player may continue to display the hold display that is not expected to change in form, which may reduce interest. There is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the lightning mode in which the hold notice effect is not executed, the hold display itself is not displayed, thereby preventing a decrease in interest. Further, if only the active display is displayed when the hold display is not displayed, the player will feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the active display is not displayed in the lightning mode.

  Further, in the fine mode and the rain mode, the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d, which are information related to the hold display, and the active display guide 1000, which is information related to the active display, are displayed. On the other hand, in the lightning mode, this information is deleted (hidden), and an appropriate display layout according to the production mode is adopted so as not to give the player a misunderstanding or discomfort. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (A), if the player wants to display the hold display on the effect mode selection screen and execute the hold announcement effect at a high rate, the user selects the fine mode and displays the hold display to display the hold display. Select the rain mode if you want to execute the hold announcement effect at a low rate, and select the lightning mode if you do not want to display the hold display and execute the hold announcement effect. The game can be played in the appropriate effect mode. Also, among the effect modes in which the hold display can be displayed, it is possible to select an effect mode (sunny mode or rain mode) depending on whether or not the user wants to execute the hold notice effect at a high rate. Diversity can enhance interest.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), in the lightning mode in which the hold display is not displayed, the control for displaying the first hold storage number in the first hold storage number special display area 1011 and the second hold storage number for the second hold storage number are performed. The display in the storage number special display area 1012 allows the player to grasp the number of storages to be held even without the hold display.

(Preliminary production performed in each production mode)
Next, specific examples of the announcement effect performed in each of the effect modes of the fine mode, the rain mode, and the lightning mode will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing execution timings of various effects executed in the fluctuation display when the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is executed based on the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in each effect mode.

  At the timing T0 in FIG. 68, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 101 has started displaying the variation of the effect symbol based on the reception of the variation pattern command specifying the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect. At this time, if the effect mode is one of the fine mode and the rain mode, there is a possibility that there is a special hold display timing in the first hold storage. If there is a special hold display timing, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display at the special hold display timing to the special hold (the process of step S8005 in FIG. 43).

  Further, when the effect mode is one of the sunny mode and the rain mode, the effect effect is executed in the first hold memory (executed in a manner that acts on the hold display, and the display mode of the hold display changes). There is a possibility that there is a timing at which it is possible to perform the effect). If any of the first holding memories has a timing at which the action effect can be executed, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the action effect is to be executed, and determines whether or not the effect effect is to be performed. A table according to the mode is selected (step S8007 in FIG. 43). Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on the random number using the selected action effect determination table, and determines the presence / absence and type of the action effect (step S8008).

  When it is determined to execute the action effect (Y in step S8009), the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the type of the effect effect determined in step S8008 (step S8010). . Then, control goes to a step S8012. As a result, during the period from (T1) to (T3) in FIG. 68, an effect is produced in which a character appears as an action effect and the character throws a ball toward a special hold (FIG. 68). (See (5) and (8) in FIG. 50 and (5) and (8) in FIG. 51).

  On the other hand, when the effect mode is the lightning mode, the hold display is not displayed, the display mode of the hold display does not change, and no action effect is performed. There is a possibility that the interest may decrease during the first half of the display. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the lightning mode, the blackout notice effect (period of T1 to T3) or the blackout notice effect (period T1 to T3) is performed in a period corresponding to the period in which the action effect is performed in other effect modes (clear mode and rain mode). By executing the lightning effect notice effect (T2 to T3), a decrease in interest is prevented.

  FIG. 69 shows a specific example of the blackout notice effect and the lightning effect notice effect. The blackout notice effect and the lightning effect notice effect are notice effects that can be executed only in the lightning mode, and are not executed in the other effect modes (sunny mode and rain mode). In FIG. 69 (A), when the variation display of the effect symbol is started in the lightning mode, immediately after that, at a predetermined ratio, a predetermined image including the background image (lightning image) displayed on the effect display device 9 is displayed. A blackout notice effect in which the visibility is reduced and the visibility becomes difficult is executed (FIG. 69 (B)).

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), even during the execution period of the blackout notice effect as a difficult-to-view effect that reduces the visibility of the image displayed on the effect display device 9, the fluctuation of the effect symbol The display is executed in a mode that is smaller than usual on the upper left of the screen, so that the player can visually recognize the variable display of the effect symbol. Although not shown, it is assumed that the variable display of the fourth symbol is also executed in a manner that can be visually recognized in the fourth symbol display area. The present invention is not limited to this mode, and during the execution period of the blackout notice effect, it may be difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the effect symbol.

  The blackout notice effect is executed at a rate of 30% when the display result of the executed variable display is a lost symbol, and at a rate of 70% when the display result of the executed variable display is a big hit symbol. Shall be. When the variation display of the effect symbols is started in the lightning mode, the player is interested in whether the screen becomes dark (whether the blackout notice effect is executed) or not, and the hold notice in the lightning mode It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the non-execution of effects and action effects.

  Also, even during the execution period of the blackout notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 69 (B) and (C), the first reserved storage number displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 1011 (this example) Then, 1) and the second reserved storage number (0 in this example) displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012 are displayed so as to be visible to the player. Even during the performance period of the effect, it is possible to grasp the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), after the blackout notice effect is executed (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 68), the lightning light image is displayed at a predetermined rate in a mode different from the background image. A lightning effect announcement effect is performed. The lightning image displayed in the lightning effect notice effect has a higher display priority than the background image (the displayed layer is higher than the background image), and is visually recognized by the player even during the execution of the blackout notice effect. Possible (screen display possible).

  The lightning effect announcement effect is executed at a rate of 10% when the displayed result of the displayed variation display is a lost symbol, and at a rate of 90% when the displayed result of the displayed variation display is a big hit symbol. Shall be. In other words, the lightning effect notice effect is an effect that has a higher rate of big hits than the blackout notice effect, and is an effect with high reliability. When the blackout notice effect is executed, the player becomes interested in whether or not the lightning effect notice effect is executed subsequently. This is because the hold notice effect and the action effect are not executed in the lightning mode. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

  The lightning effect notice effect ends when the blackout notice effect ends (T3 in FIG. 68). As shown in FIG. 69 (D), when the blackout notice effect ends, the background of the lightning image returns to a state where it can be visually recognized again, and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is continued.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the lightning effect notice effect can be executed only when the blackout notice effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the blackout notice effect is executed. Irrespective of whether or not, the lightning effect notice effect may be executable.

  The blackout notice effect may be executable in an effect mode in which a hold display and a hold notice effect can be executed, such as a fine mode or a rain mode. When the blackout notice effect is executed in the fine mode or the rain mode, the hold display and the active display become difficult to be visually recognized during the effect period like the background image, and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and the second hold The display guides 1002a to 1002d and the active display guide 1000 are also difficult to view similarly to the background image. However, even during the effect period, the first number of reserved memories displayed in the first reserved number of special storage area 1011 and the second reserved number of memories displayed in the second reserved number of special display area 1012 are shown in FIG. Similar to the example shown in FIG. 69 (B), it is visible to the player.

  That is, two systems of the number-of-retained-storage display control executed on the effect control board 80 side (display of the reserved display in the first reserved-storage display unit 9a and the second reserved-storage display unit 9b, the first reserved-storage-number special display area 1011) And the display of the number of reserved storage in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012), the blackout notice effect is displayed for one (display of the reserved display in the first reserved storage display unit 9a and the second reserved storage display unit 9b). During the execution period, the number of reserved storages (the number of displayed suspended displays) becomes difficult to see, but the other (the number of reserved storages in the first reserved reserved storage number special display area 1011 and the second reserved reserved number special display area 1012) With regard to (2), the number of reserved memories remains visible to the player even during the execution period of the blackout notice effect.

  Next, a specific example of the announcement effect performed after the reach state is established in each effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72.

(In case of sunny mode)
When the effect mode is the fine mode and the reach effect execution timing (T4 in FIG. 68) according to the variation pattern is reached, the same as the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area as shown in FIG. Is reached, and the reach state in which the reach symbol (“7” in this example) is stopped is established, and the reach effect in which the character 1100 “REACH !!” is displayed at the top of the screen is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), immediately after the execution of the reach effect (at the timing indicated by T5 in FIG. 68), the cut-in notice effect is executed at a predetermined rate. The cut-in notice effect is an effect that indicates the expectation of a big hit by displaying the cut-in image 1200 and characters displayed on the cut-in image 1200.

  When the display result of the executed variable display is a lost symbol, the cut-in image 1200 is not displayed at a rate of 60%, and the cut-in image 1200 is displayed at a rate of 40%. Here, the character “Chance!” Is displayed on the cut-in image 1200 at a rate of 38%, and the character “Super heat!” Is displayed on the cut-in image 1200 at a rate of 2%.

  When the display result of the executed variable display is a big hit symbol, the cut-in image 1200 is not displayed at a rate of 10%, and the cut-in image 1200 is displayed at a rate of 90%. Here, the character “CHANCE!” Is displayed in the cut-in image 1200 at a rate of 40%, and the character “hot” is displayed in the cut-in image 1200 at a rate of 50%.

  Therefore, the player is interested in whether or not the cut-in image 1200 is displayed immediately after the execution of the reach effect, and when the cut-in image 1200 is displayed, pays attention to the characters displayed there. It becomes possible to improve the interest after the reach state is established. In the example shown in FIG. 70 (B), a cut-in image 1200 is displayed, and the character of "super heat !!" is displayed therein, so that the player expects a big hit.

  Next, immediately after the cut-in notice effect (at the timing indicated by T6 in FIG. 68), the mode character notice effect is executed at a predetermined rate. The mode character announcement effect is, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), an image of a character corresponding to the current effect mode (here, the fine mode) (in the fine mode, the character with the character “fine” displayed on the face) By displaying the image 1300a), the effect suggests the degree of expectation to be a big hit.

  When the display result of the executed variable display is a lost symbol, an image 1300a of the character corresponding to the fine mode is displayed at a rate of 5%, and the display result of the executed variable display is a big hit symbol. In this case, an image 1300a of the character corresponding to the fine mode is displayed at a rate of 20%. Therefore, the player is interested in whether or not the image 1300a of the character corresponding to the current production mode of the fine mode appears after the execution of the cut-in notice production.

  The mode character announcement effect can be executed in any of the effect modes (sunny mode, rain mode, and lightning mode) regardless of whether or not the cut-in announcement effect is executed. When the mode character announcement effect ends (at the timing indicated by T7 in FIG. 68), as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the fluctuation display of the middle symbol in the reach state continues, and the display result is finally derived and displayed. (Timing shown at T8 in FIG. 68).

(In rain mode)
When the effect mode is the rain mode and the reach effect execution timing (T4 in FIG. 68) according to the fluctuation pattern is reached, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the same as the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. Is reached, and the reach state in which the reach symbol (“7” in this example) is stopped is established, and the reach effect in which the character 1100 “REACH !!” is displayed at the top of the screen is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), immediately after the execution of the reach effect (at the timing indicated by T5 in FIG. 68), the cut-in is performed in the same manner and in the same manner as in the case of the fine mode and the case of the lightning mode described later. A notice effect is performed.

  Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the cut-in image 1200 is displayed immediately after the execution of the reach effect, and if the cut-in image 1200 is displayed, the characters displayed there. It is possible to improve the interest after the reach state is established. In the example shown in FIG. 71 (B), a cut-in image 1200 is displayed, and the character “Super heat !!” is displayed there.

  Next, immediately after the cut-in notice effect (at the timing indicated by T6 in FIG. 68), the mode character notice effect is executed at a predetermined rate. That is, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), an image of the character corresponding to the current effect mode (here, rain mode) (in the rain mode, an image 1300b of the character in which the character “rain” is displayed on the face) is displayed. By doing so, the degree of expectation to be a big hit is suggested.

  When the display result of the executed variable display is a lost symbol, an image 1300b of the character corresponding to the rain mode is displayed at a rate of 10%, and the display result of the executed variable display is a big hit symbol. In this case, the image 1300b of the character corresponding to the rain mode is displayed at a rate of 50%. Therefore, the player is interested in whether or not the image 1300b of the character corresponding to the rain mode as the current production mode appears after the execution of the cut-in notice production. When the mode character announcement effect ends (at the timing indicated by T7 in FIG. 68), as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the fluctuation display of the middle symbol in the reach state continues, and the display result is finally derived and displayed. (Timing shown at T8 in FIG. 68).

(For lightning mode)
When the effect mode is the lightning mode and the reach effect execution timing (T4 in FIG. 68) according to the variation pattern is reached, the same as the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area as shown in FIG. Is reached, and the reach state in which the reach symbol (“7” in this example) is stopped is established, and the reach effect in which the character 1100 “REACH !!” is displayed at the top of the screen is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), immediately after the execution of the reach effect (at the timing indicated by T5 in FIG. 68), the cut-in notice effect is produced in the same mode and in the same ratio as in the case of the fine mode and the case of the rain mode. Is executed.

  Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the cut-in image 1200 is displayed immediately after the execution of the reach effect, and if the cut-in image 1200 is displayed, the characters displayed there. It is possible to improve the interest after the reach state is established. In the example shown in FIG. 72 (B), a cut-in image 1200 is displayed, and the character “Super heat !!” is displayed there.

  Next, immediately after the cut-in notice effect (at the timing indicated by T6 in FIG. 68), the mode character notice effect is executed at a predetermined rate. That is, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), an image of the character corresponding to the current production mode (here, the lightning mode) (in the lightning mode, an image 1300c of the character in which the character “thunder” is displayed on the face) is displayed. By doing so, the degree of expectation to be a big hit is suggested.

  When the display result of the executed variable display is a lost symbol, the image 1300c of the character corresponding to the lightning mode is displayed at a rate of 15%, and the display result of the executed variable display becomes a big hit symbol. In this case, the image 1300c of the character corresponding to the lightning mode is displayed at a rate of 90%. Therefore, the player is interested in whether or not the image 1300c of the character corresponding to the current lightning mode, the lightning mode, appears after the execution of the cut-in notice effect. When the mode character announcement effect ends (timing indicated by T7 in FIG. 68), as shown in FIG. 72 (D), the variable display of the middle symbol in the reach state continues, and the display result is finally derived and displayed. (Timing shown at T8 in FIG. 68).

  As described above, the types of the notice effects that can be executed differ depending on the effect mode (for example, the blackout notice effect and the lightning effect notice effect can be executed only in the lightning mode). You will be interested in the announcement effect performed in the mode, and you will also be interested in which effect mode is selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in any of the effect modes of the fine mode, the rain mode, and the lightning mode, the cut-in notice effect can be executed immediately after the reach state is established. In this way, by making it possible to execute a common type of effect regardless of the effect mode, it is possible to prevent the number of effect types from being excessively increased and the storage amount of effect data from being excessively increased. Can be. Further, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect and the allocation of each mode when the cut-in notice effect is executed (the ratio in which the character of “chance!” Is displayed, and “hot heat! Is also common regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, the execution control of the cut-in notice effect (for example, a table for determining the execution ratio and the mode allocation) can be shared regardless of the effect mode, and the control can be simplified.

  The execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect may be made different depending on the production mode.For example, the execution ratio is the highest in the lightning mode, the second highest in the rain mode, and the highest in the sunny mode. The ratio may be low.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a character announcement effect, which is one type of announcement effect, can be executed in any of the effect modes of the sunny mode, the rain mode, and the lightning mode. The character announcement effect is performed in a different manner (an image 1300a of the character according to the sunny mode, an image 1300b of the character according to the rain mode, and an image of the character 1300c according to the lightning mode) depending on the effect mode. , Which are executed at different rates depending on the production mode (the highest execution rate in the lightning mode, the second highest execution rate in the rain mode, and the lowest execution rate in the fine mode). Interest can be generated according to the.

  In the present embodiment, with respect to the lightning mode in which the hold display is not displayed and the hold announcement effect is not executed, the type of the fluctuating announcement effect for the running variation display is such that the hold display is displayed and the hold announcement effect can be executed. Since the number of other production modes (sunny mode, rain mode) is higher than that of other production modes, and the execution ratio of the fluctuating preliminary production is set higher than that of the other production modes, the lowering of interest due to the absence of the hold preliminary production and action production is not performed. Can be suppressed. Further, in the rain mode in which the execution ratio of the hold announcement effect is lower than in the fine mode, the execution ratio of the fluctuating announcement effect is set higher than in the fine mode. It should be noted that the number of types of the notice effect during fluctuation that can be executed in the rain mode may be provided more than in the clear mode.

  Contrary to the present embodiment, with respect to the lightning mode in which the hold display is not displayed and the hold announcement effect is not executed, the type of the fluctuating announcement effect for the running fluctuation display is indicated by the hold display and the hold advance notice is displayed. The effect may be set to be smaller than other effect modes (sunny mode, rain mode) in which the effect can be executed, and the execution ratio of the fluctuating notice effect may be set lower than the other effect modes. It is possible to set an effect mode suitable for a player who does not like to execute a notice effect at high frequency. Also, regarding the rain mode in which the execution ratio of the hold announcement effect is lower than the sunny mode, the execution ratio of the fluctuating announcement effect may be set lower than in the clear mode, and the type of the fluctuating announcement effect that can be executed in the rain mode. May be less than in the fine mode.

(Other examples related to the production mode selection screen)
In the above example, during the period in which the gaming state is the normal state and the customer waiting demonstration is being executed, the effect mode selection screen (FIG. 66 (A)) is displayed on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the operation of the player, An example in which an arbitrary effect mode can be selected from “sunny mode”, “rain mode”, and “thunder mode” has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and a period in which the game mode is controlled to the big hit game state. An effect mode selection screen may be displayed as an effect to be performed on the game, and the effect mode after the end of the big hit gaming state may be selectable by the player.

  That is, the effect control CPU 101 performs any of the effects executed in the big hit display process (S804), the round process (S805), the round post-process (S806), and the big hit end effect process (S807) shown in FIG. As an effect mode selection screen is displayed, even if the effect mode in the probable change state or the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state can be selected from `` sunny mode '', `` rain mode '', and `` thunder mode '' good. The player selects an effect mode after the end of the big hit gaming state by operating the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 during the big hit gaming state.

  Here, regardless of which of the production modes of the sunny mode, the rain mode, and the lightning mode is controlled, whether the current gaming state is the normal state, the probable change state, or the time saving state Is displayed as common information. In addition, regarding the number of variable display times (n) executed after being controlled to the time reduction state or the remaining number of variable display times (100-n in this example) executable in the time reduction state, common information is used in any of the effect modes. Will be displayed as

  Note that there is a so-called special time (ST) game machine in which the upper limit value (for example, 60 times) of the number of variable display times that can be executed in the probability change state is predetermined. In the game machine of the ST system, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the state is controlled to the certain change state, and when the variable display corresponding to the upper limit is executed without the next big hit occurring, the certain change state ends and the normal change ends. Transition to the state. In such an ST-type gaming machine, the remaining variable display count up to the upper limit (remaining ST count) is displayed as common information regardless of the effect mode.

  Further, the number of extended rooms is displayed as common information regardless of which of the production modes, the fine mode, the rain mode, and the lightning mode, is controlled. The extended cottage means that the next big hit occurs based on the variable display executed in the probable change state or the time saving state without shifting to the normal state after the end of one big hit game state, and the number of extended villas is " The number of consecutive holidays +1 "is calculated. In addition, the number of balls paid out to the player during the period of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the number of balls being paid out to the player during the period including the jackpot gaming state, and the cumulative number of balls paid out to the player during the extended game including the jackpot gaming state Regarding the value of the number of balls in the series, which is a value, is also displayed as common information. As described above, information that is of high interest to the player is appropriately displayed in any of the effect modes.

  In the present example, the background image is made different according to the effect mode. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the characters appearing according to the effect mode may be different. For example, when a battle effect is performed in which the ally character and the enemy character battle and a win or loss results in a big hit, the ally character may be changed according to the effect mode. When the player selects his favorite ally character on the effect mode selection screen, the player is controlled to the effect mode in which a notice effect or a battle effect in which the ally character appears is executed.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the player can select a desired effect mode by operating the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 on the effect mode selection screen. However, the present invention is not limited to such an example. Instead, the effect mode of the player may be selectable by detecting the operation of the player by a touch sensor, or the effect mode may be selectable by detecting the operation of the player by a human sensor such as an infrared sensor.

  On the effect mode selection screen, if the player does not select any effect mode (if the bush button 120 is not operated during the selection period), a predetermined effect mode (a so-called default effect) is set. Mode). The effect mode controlled in this case may be an effect mode (sunny mode) in which the hold display is performed and the hold announcement effect is the highest, and the hold display is performed and the execution ratio of the hold announcement effect is the second. The effect mode (rain mode) may be a higher effect mode (rain mode), or the hold mode is not performed and the hold notice effect is not executed. Further, the effect mode selected last time may be automatically selected when the selection operation is not performed this time.

  In addition, the effect mode may be switched without depending on the operation of the player. When the game is controlled to the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery to set the effect mode, and based on the result of the lottery. Thus, the effect mode after the end of the big hit gaming state may be determined. Further, the effect control CPU 101 may automatically switch the effect mode every predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) of the fluctuation display (for example, switch in the order of the sunny mode, the rain mode, and the lightning mode). In the case of a game machine of the ST system, the effect mode may be switched in accordance with the remaining variable display count up to the above-described upper limit (the remaining ST count). The mode may be controlled to the fine mode for a period of up to 41 times, the rain mode for a period of 40 to 21 times, and the lightning mode for a period of 20 times or less. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 may automatically switch the effect mode according to the game state (normal state, time saving state, probable change state). For example, in the normal state, the mode is controlled to the sunny mode or the rain mode, The lightning mode may be controlled in the time saving state and the probable change state.

(Other examples related to display control of the number of held storages)
In the above embodiment, the display control of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number on the effect control board 80 side is performed in each of the plurality of areas in the effect display device 9, and two systems of display control are executed. Have been. First, control is performed to display the number of hold displays corresponding to the first number of hold storages on the first hold display unit 9a, and the number of hold displays corresponding to the second number of hold storages is displayed on the second hold display unit 9b. The second is control for displaying the first reserved storage number in the first reserved storage number special display area 1011 and control for displaying the second reserved storage number in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012. is there. The present invention is not limited to this mode, and the second (the latter) is configured to display the first storage number and the second storage number on a display device different from the effect display device 9 on which the hold display is displayed. May be. For example, the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number may be displayed on a liquid crystal display device (a so-called sub liquid crystal device) different from the effect display device 9, and may be displayed above the liquid crystal display device 9 (the first special symbol). A display for the first number of reserved storages constituted by 7-segment LEDs on the center decoration installed at the position closer to the effect display device 9 than the reserved storage display 18a and the second special symbol reserved storage display 18b). And a display for the second number of reserved storages may be provided to display the first number of reserved storages and the second number of reserved storages. In addition, two LEDs are provided as a display for the first reserved storage number, and two LEDs are provided as a display for the second reserved storage number. 0 to 4 may be indicated (for example, 0 when both are turned off, 1 when only one is turned on, 2 when the other is turned on, 3 when both are turned on, 4 when both are turned on, and so on).

(Other examples of display layout)
In the present embodiment, as described above, the visibility of the active display (whether the active display is displayed) and the visibility of the hold display (whether the hold display is displayed), and the display of the active announcement effect There are a plurality of effect modes in which the execution ratio (whether the active advance effect is executed) and the execution ratio of the pending advance effect (whether the advance effect is executed) are different. In the fine mode and the rain mode, the active display and the hold display can be visually recognized, and the active notice effect and the hold notice effect can be executed (the execution ratio is not 0). , The active display and the hold display are invisible, and the active advance notice effect and the hold advance notice effect are not executed.

  In the effect display device 9, the display layout of information related to the active display and the hold display is also different depending on the effect mode. In the fine mode and the rain mode, the active display and the active display guide 1000 are displayed, and the hold display and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d are displayed. In the mode, both the active display and the active display guide 1000 are not displayed, and the hold display and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d are both not displayed.

  Thus, the display layout of the information related to the active display and the hold display is made different depending on the effect mode. In the effect mode corresponding to the normal state, the active display guide 1000 and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d may be displayed while the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d may not be displayed. In the effect mode corresponding to the state, the active display guide 1000 and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d may be displayed while the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d may not be displayed. Further, in the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state or the probable change state, the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d may be displayed while the active display guide 1000 and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d may not be displayed.

  Further, information corresponding to the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d may not be displayed regardless of the game state. For example, in the effect mode corresponding to the normal state, the active display guide 1000 and the first hold display guide 1001a are provided. On the other hand, in the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state or the probable change state, the active display guide 1000 and the first reserved display guides 1001a to 1001d are displayed (information corresponding to the second reserved display guides 1002a to 1002d does not originally exist). 1001d may not be displayed (information corresponding to the second suspension display guides 1002a to 1002d does not originally exist). That is, in the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state or the probable change state, the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage is displayed, but the position where the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage is to be displayed (when the start condition is satisfied). The information corresponding to the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d (corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol not established) is not displayed, and the active display 1000 corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol for which the start condition is satisfied is not displayed. May not be displayed.

  In the effect mode corresponding to the normal state, the hold display corresponding to the first hold memory is displayed side by side, whereas in the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state or the probable change state, the hold mode corresponding to the second hold memory is displayed. The display may be displayed vertically. In the effect mode corresponding to the normal state, the hold display corresponding to the first holding memory is displayed in a normal size or a normal shape (for example, a round shape), whereas in the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state or the probable change state. Alternatively, the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage may be displayed in a special size or a special shape (for example, a character shape or the like) larger than the normal size. As described above, when the gaming state is the time saving state or the probable change state (when the production mode is controlled to the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state or the probable change state) (for example, in the case of Y in S6002 of FIG. 37, ), The execution rate of the hold announcement effect is lower than when the game state is the normal state (when the effect mode is controlled to the normal state) (in the example of FIG. 37, the hold advance effect is not executed).

  In addition, while the active display (and the active display guide 1000) can be displayed and the active announcement effect can be executed, the hold display (and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d) can be displayed. An effect mode in which no active announcement effect is displayed without displaying the active display (and the active display guide 1000) while the active announcement (and the active display guide 1000) is not displayed, and an on-hold display (and the first on-hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and the second on-hold) are not displayed. The display mode may be switchable between an effect mode in which the display guides 1002a to 1002d) can be displayed and a holding notice effect can be executed.

  In addition, the display ratio of the character selected by the player, the position where the character is displayed, and the size of the displayed character may be different depending on the effect mode. Further, the position at which the number of retained storages is displayed and the size of the display may be different depending on the effect mode. Further, the position where the fourth symbol is displayed and the size where the fourth symbol is displayed may be different depending on the effect mode. Further, during the execution of a specific effect such as an action effect or a battle effect, a variation display of the effect symbol (that is, a variation display of the effect information corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol) is displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Is performed in a reduced mode, but the display position and size (reduction degree) of the effect symbol to be reduced and displayed may be different depending on the effect mode. Further, when the variation display of the effect information corresponding to the variation display of the ordinary symbol is executed at the end of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the display position and the size of the effect information are different depending on the effect mode. You may do it.

  In addition, in accordance with the effect mode, a ratio (whether or not to display) information on the content (customized content) uniquely set by the player, a position at which the information is displayed, and the information are displayed. The sizes may be different. For example, a ratio (whether or not to display the level bar) at which adjustment information (for example, a level bar indicating the current volume or luminance level) for adjusting the volume or luminance level is displayed, and the adjustment information And the size at which the adjustment information is displayed may be different. In addition, not only during the period in which the effect control CPU 101 is performing the customer waiting demonstration, but also during the period in which the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed and the period in which the large hit game state is controlled. The adjustment information may be displayed so that the volume and brightness levels can be changed.

  Further, in accordance with the effect mode, the number of points given based on the type and number of executed effects (the value is different from the value usable in the gaming machine given based on the winning of the game ball in the winning area) And may be different in the position and size at which the experience value is displayed. In addition, with respect to a mission effect that informs the possibility of a big hit depending on whether or not a specific mission has been achieved, a ratio (whether or not to display) information on the mission effect according to the effect mode, The displayed position and the size at which the information is displayed may be different.

  Also, depending on the effect mode, whether or not to display the number of balls in the extended game, the position to display the number of balls in the extended game, and the size to display the number of balls in the extended game are different. Is also good. In addition, depending on the effect mode, the ratio of displaying the type of the jackpot generated during the extended villa (whether or not to display it), the display position of the jackpot type, and the size of displaying the jackpot type may be different. In addition, the ratio of displaying the number of connected villas (whether or not to display), the display position of the number of connected villas, and the size of displaying the number of connected villas may be different depending on the effect mode.

  A special variable prize is obtained when a game ball is fired to the right of the center of the game area (when the ball is hit right) than when the game ball is fired to the left of the center of the game area (when hit left). When the ball device has a configuration in which the game ball can easily win (including the case where the special variable winning ball device is provided on the right side of the center of the game area), when the display result of the variable display becomes a big hit symbol , A display for instructing right-handing is performed by the effect display device 9. The display ratio (whether or not to display), the display position, and the display size of the display for instructing right-handing may be different depending on the effect mode.

  In addition, when the music (so-called BGM) output during the execution of the variable display can be selected, the ratio for displaying the image for selecting the music (whether or not to display), the image, May be different from each other in the display position and the size of the displayed image (or the number of selectable music pieces).

  Regarding the example of the difference of the display layout according to the effect mode described above, when the gaming machine includes the effect display device 9 and a liquid crystal display device (so-called sub-display device) different from the effect display device 9, the plurality Some of the (two) display devices (for example, the sub-display device) adopt a common display layout regardless of the effect mode, and other display devices (for example, the effect display device 9) respond to the effect mode. Different display layouts. Further, in both of the two display devices, the display layout may be made different depending on the effect mode.

(Example of look-ahead notice production other than reservation notice production)
In the above-described embodiment, the variable display, which is a target of the pre-reading notice effect, is used as a pre-read notice effect for a variable display in which the starting condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. The holding notice effect in which the display mode of the corresponding hold display is changed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a chance notice notice effect and a look-ahead notice effect in which a special display result such as a chance sign pattern is stopped and displayed continuously over a plurality of changes. A countdown notice effect that counts down the remaining number of changes up to the target change over a plurality of changes can be executed as another type of prefetch notice effect.

  In this case, in the lightning mode, although the hold notice effect is not executed, another type of pre-read notice effect such as a chance eye notice effect or a countdown notice effect may be executable. Then, in the lightning mode, the execution ratio of another type of prefetch notice effect may be higher than other effect modes (sunny mode and rain mode) in which the hold notice effect can be executed. Further, in the lightning mode, the number of types of the prefetch notice effect that can be executed in addition to the hold notice effect may be greater than other effect modes (sunny mode and rain mode) that can execute the hold notice effect. According to this, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the fact that the hold notice effect is not executed.

  Note that, in the lightning mode, other types of pre-reading notice effects may not be executed as in the case of the hold notice effect (that is, no pre-read notice effects may be executed), and other effect modes (clear mode and rain mode) may be used. ) May be executed at a lower rate than other types of pre-reading notice effects (however, the execution rate is not 0).

(Example of slot machine)
In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as a gaming machine capable of performing variable display and capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display, but the gaming machine having such a configuration is a pachinko gaming machine. The slot machine is not limited to one and may be a slot machine.

  The slot machine includes a variable display device having a plurality of reels (for example, three reels of a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) on which a plurality of types of symbols as identification information are drawn on an outer peripheral portion. The player sets the number of bets (1 to 3 medals) and operates the start lever to start rotation of each reel, and the player operates a stop button provided for each reel. As a result, the rotation is stopped within a range of a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing.

  The rotation and stop of each reel are performed by a reel motor corresponding to each reel, and a motor drive circuit corresponding to each reel motor is provided on a game control board for controlling a game. The game control board is provided with a main control unit having a main CPU and the like, and the main control unit transmits a control command to a motor drive circuit to control rotation and stop of the reel motor. Then, a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped (or according to the internal lottery result regardless of the display result).

  There are various types of winning combinations, such as small roles, special roles, and replays. Here, in the small prize winning, the player can obtain a profit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small prize. In the winning of the special combination, the player can obtain a benefit that the next game is shifted to a game state advantageous to the player such as a regular bonus (RB) or a big bonus (BB). In the winning of the re-game combination, it is possible to obtain an advantage that the next game can be performed without consuming a new medal for setting the bet amount.

  In such a slot machine, after the end of the bonus, it is possible to play the game while suppressing the decrease in the gaming value by increasing the probability of winning the replaying game as usual, as an advantageous state for the player. In some cases, control is performed at a possible replay time (referred to as RT), and RT is ended when an end condition including winning of a predetermined falling prize combination is satisfied. Further, there is a type in which an effect state can be controlled during an assist time (referred to as AT), which is an information period during which a navigation effect (for example, guiding the pressing order) for notifying an internal lottery result can be executed. A state in which the gaming state is RT and the production state is controlled by AT is also referred to as an assist replay time (ART). The main control unit sets a flag corresponding to each game state, a winning combination, and the like, and executes a process (including transmission of a production control command to the sub control unit) corresponding to the set flag. The game is controlled. Further, an effect control command for causing the effect control board to execute an effect according to each game state or a winning combination is transmitted from the main control unit to the sub-control unit.

  The lottery of the role, the lottery of the AT, the lottery of the RT, and the lottery of the ART, and the additional lottery of the number of AT, RT, and ART are stored in the RAM at the start of the game (immediately after the start switch is operated), for example. This is performed based on the game state indicated by the current game state flag being set, and the winning flag of the winning combination is stored. Whether or not the winning combination is actually established is determined by a winning flag stored in the RAM, the operation timing of the stop button, and the like.

  In addition, the effect control board 80 of the pachinko gaming machine in the above embodiment includes an effect control CPU 101 for performing a control operation according to a program, a ROM for storing an effect control program and fixed data, and the like. Although a RAM for providing an area and a display control unit for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 9 are mounted, an effect control board is also provided in a slot machine similarly. A sub-control unit having a sub-CPU for performing a control operation according to a program, a ROM for storing a program for effect control and fixed data, and a RAM for providing a work area for the sub-CPU, and a display operation in a liquid crystal display device. And a display control circuit for controlling the display.

  In such a slot machine, the sub CPU causes the liquid crystal display device to display a specific display corresponding to a game (variable display) that has not been executed yet in one of the first mode and the second mode. May be. For example, when the player wins an advantageous state such as AT, RT, or ART, a specific display corresponding to each game controlled in the advantageous state is displayed in the first mode, and then the game (variable display) is performed. The specific display may be changed from the first mode to the second mode in response to establishment of a related predetermined condition.

  For example, when an AT of 50 games is won, the first to 50th specific displays are respectively displayed in a first mode (for example, blue). Then, every time the AT is completed for one game (every time one game is completed or every time the start lever is operated with the bet amount set), the first specific display of the first mode is deleted, and A shift effect is performed in which the specific display after the first display is shifted one by one (the n-th specific display is shifted to the (n-1) th position). Then, when the additional lottery is performed during the AT period, the specific display of the number corresponding to the AT number including the determined additional number is displayed in the second mode (for example, red). For example, when the remaining AT is n games and the additional lottery is won in 20 games, the first to (n + 20) -th specific displays are displayed in the second mode. That is, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display from the first mode to the second mode is executed.

  The display control of the specific display may be performed not only in the case of the AT but also in the case of the RT, the ART, and the like, as in the case of the AT.

  Further, the specific display corresponding to each game may be displayed in the first mode when the possibility of the advantageous state is low, and may be displayed in the second mode when the possibility of the advantageous state is high. good. For example, a specific display outside the AT period is displayed in the first mode at a rate of 80% (displayed in the second mode at a rate of 20%), and a specific display within the AT period is displayed at a rate of 80%. It may be displayed in the second mode (displayed in the first mode at a rate of 20%). In addition, for each specific display displayed during the AT period, if the number of games until the end of the AT is less than a predetermined number of games based on the specific display, the specific display is displayed at a rate of 80% in the first mode. (Displayed in the second mode at a rate of 20%). If the number of games until the end of the AT is equal to or more than a predetermined number of games based on the specific display, the specific display is displayed at a rate of 80%. The information may be displayed in the second mode (displayed in the first mode at a rate of 20%).

  In the above-exemplified configuration, the occurrence of a predetermined trigger (for example, winning a role that can be controlled to an advantageous state such as AT, RT, and ART, winning a predetermined small role, and displaying a specific display (For example, winning a production lottery that determines whether or not to execute a change production that changes the aspect), although the ratio originally displayed in the second aspect is high, the original aspect is displayed in the first aspect. By changing the display mode of the specified display from the first mode to the second mode, interest can be enhanced.

  As described above, the slot machine capable of displaying the specific display and executing the change effect of changing the display mode of the specific display can also display the specific display similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above. There is a first effect mode (corresponding to the above-described sunny mode and rain mode) capable of executing the change effect, and a second effect mode (corresponding to the above-described lightning mode) in which the specific display is not displayed and the change effect is not executed. It shall be. That is, when the second effect mode is selected, the specific display is not displayed and the change effect is not executed, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode are switched by an operation of the player or the like. Is possible.

(Other modifications)
In each of the above-described embodiments, the variation time, the type of the reach effect, the presence / absence of a pseudo series (an effect in which one or more symbols are temporarily stopped and re-changed during one variable display) and the like are described. An example has been described in which one variation pattern command is transmitted when the variation is started in order to notify the variation control pattern 100 indicating the variation mode to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the variation pattern is produced using two or more commands. The control microcomputer 100 may be notified. Specifically, in the case of notifying with two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not there is a pseudo-run, whether or not there is a slide effect as a first command, before reaching (or when reaching, the so-called A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode (before the second stop) is transmitted, and as a second command, the type of reach, the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect, and the like, from the time when reach is reached (if the reach is not reached, the so-called A command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode after the second stop may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in variable display (variable display) based on a variable time derived from a combination of two commands. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 may notify the fluctuating time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may select a specific fluctuating mode executed at each timing. . When two commands are transmitted, two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period elapses after the first command is transmitted (for example, the next A second command may be transmitted (at a timer interrupt). Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to such an example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the variation pattern with two or more commands in this way, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, “different ratios” means not only those having different ratios in a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0%, and the ratio is different (that is, one is 100% allocation and the other is 0% allocation).

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, for example, a case has been described in which a plurality of types of special symbols, effect symbols, and ordinary symbols of “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. It is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the symbol variably displayed and the symbol derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol different from the symbol variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, variable display may be performed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Also in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be finally derived and displayed, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be finally derived and displayed. It may be something.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine has been described as an example of a gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are provided in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When a combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is rotated in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, the predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize, but includes a game medium such as a game ball, and a scoring system for awarding a score when a condition for giving a prize is satisfied. It can also be applied to a game machine of the type.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, there is a gaming machine that is controlled to the positive change state after the end of the big hit game, based on the fact that the big hit type includes the probability changing big hit and the normal big hit, and the big hit type is determined to be the probability changing big hit. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable prize ball device provided with a predetermined variable region therein (a variable variable prize ball device may be provided in only one special variable prize ball device, or a plurality of special variable prize balls may be provided. A probability change area may be provided in a part of the device), the probability change is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability change area in the special variable winning prize ball device during the big hit game, and the big hit game The configuration described in each of the above embodiments can be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a probable change state after completion.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not a big hit is to be made or a prize-winning determination of a variation pattern type (pre-reading determination), and a command (symbol designating) indicating the prize-winning determination result. Command, a fluctuation category command), and the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the hold announcement effect based on the command indicating the winning determination result. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform a prize-winning determination (pre-reading determination). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command for designating only the value of the random number for random determination (random R) or the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted at the time of occurrence of the start winning. The effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to make a prize-winning determination (pre-reading determination) based on a random number value specified by the command.

  INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 production display (main display)
9a first holding storage display section 9b second holding storage display section 13 first starting winning opening 14 second starting winning opening 20 special variable winning prize ball device 31 game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 game control microcomputer 80 effect control board 100 effect control microcomputer 101 effect control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (4)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display in a specific display area corresponding to the hold storage which is information on the variable display,
Determining means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display corresponding to the specific display is executed;
Based on the determination result of the determination unit, a specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect including a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display,
A first effect mode in which the specific display can be displayed during the variable display and the specific effect can be executed, and a second effect mode in which the specific display is not displayed during the variable display and the specific effect is not executed can be controlled. Effect mode control means,
A predetermined effect capable of executing a predetermined effect for reducing the visibility of a predetermined display area including the specific display area when the first effect mode is controlled and when the second effect mode is controlled; Means of execution;
Wherein the execution period of predetermined effect, in the predetermined display region, and a hold memory number informing means for informing the hold memory number in different from the specific display area region,
Wherein the predetermined demonstration execution unit, when it is controlled by the second rendering mode, and executes the predetermined effect at a higher rate than when it is controlled by the first rendering mode,
And wherein the execution period of the predetermined effect when the second is controlled to effect mode, a special effect that is not performed when it is controlled to the first presentation mode can be performed in the predetermined display region Gaming machine to do. A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display in a specific display area;
Determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition related to the variable display is satisfied,
Based on the determination result of the determination unit, a specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect including a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display,
A first effect mode in which a specific display can be displayed during the variable display and the specific effect can be executed, and a second effect mode in which the specific display is not displayed during the variable display and the specific effect is not executed can be controlled. Effect mode control means,
A predetermined effect capable of executing a predetermined effect for reducing the visibility of a predetermined display area including the specific display area when the first effect mode is controlled and when the second effect mode is controlled; Means of execution;
Wherein the execution period of predetermined effect, in the predetermined display region, and a hold memory number informing means for informing the hold memory number in different from the specific display area region,
Wherein the predetermined demonstration execution unit, when it is controlled by the second rendering mode, and executes the predetermined effect at a higher rate than when it is controlled by the first rendering mode,
And wherein the execution period of the predetermined effect when the second is controlled to effect mode, a special effect that is not performed when it is controlled to the first presentation mode can be performed in the predetermined display region Gaming machine to do. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The specific effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect indicating that the display mode of the specific display changes after displaying the specific display in the first mode, and a change effect changing the display mode of the specific display. And
The display mode of the specific display includes at least the first mode and a second mode in which the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first mode.
The specific display means can display a specific display in a plurality of types of display modes as the first mode,
The second aspect includes a predetermined mode and a specific mode in which the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the predetermined mode,
The specific effect execution means,
After executing the suggestion effect, there are cases where the change effect is executed or not,
As a change effect, after displaying the specific display according to the first aspect, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second aspect, and displaying the specific display after displaying the specific display according to the first aspect An effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode when the mode is not changed to the second mode,
An effect of changing the display mode of the specific display changed to the third mode to the specific mode can be executed,
Depending on the execution mode of the executed change effect, being capable of performing suggestion effect by different proportions after the change effect,
It is possible to execute multiple types of suggestion effects,
When the display mode of the specific display changes according to which one of the plurality of types of display mode displays the specific display as the first mode, any type of suggestion effect is performed. The ratio of
A gaming machine wherein the specific display displayed in the third aspect has a lower rate of change to the predetermined aspect than the specific display displayed in the first aspect. The gaming machine according to claim 3,
The specific display means can display a specific display in a display mode including a special mode suggesting the effect contents,
Special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the special mode,
After displaying the specific display in the special mode, the specific display means can change the display mode of the specific display when a special effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the special mode is executed. A gaming machine characterized by:

Images